JP5562050B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are paid out to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There are some which are configured to be controllable to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol).

  Such a gaming machine does not determine whether or not to enter the big hit gaming state at the start of fluctuation of the starting memory, but determines whether to enter the big hit gaming state at the time of winning a random number, in other words, at the start winning opening. Thus, there is known one equipped with a so-called continuous notice function that continuously performs notice effects across a plurality of start memories (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, in gaming machines such as slot machines, a specific gaming state such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is stored in the stock (right to enter a specific gaming state) according to the result of the effect display displayed on the effect display unit provided separately from the drum rotation unit. It has been proposed to change the number of generated stocks according to the result of the effect display (for example, see Patent Document 2).

JP 2005-230117 A JP 2003-0779820 A

  In a pachinko machine, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is entered when winning at the start winning opening, and the effect of stocking the jackpot gaming state is executed, and the stock is released in the variable display when the jackpot gaming state is entered. It is conceivable to perform an effect to be performed (for example, an effect to erase the hold display of the right to be a big hit gaming state).

  However, in the variable display when the big hit gaming state is entered, there is a possibility that the effect of releasing the stock and the big hit gaming state may be executed in the case of performing an effect that the big hit gaming state is determined as another production. If the effect that suggests high is executed in duplicate, the effect of directing the big hit gaming state or directing the stock is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the effect of a gaming machine that produces an effect of stocking a specific gaming state and releasing the stock.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention is provided in a game area into which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is driven, and forms a start prize opening through which the game medium can enter (for example, a normal prize) Ball device 6A, ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, etc.), start winning detection means (for example, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, etc.) for detecting the game medium that has entered the start winning port, based on the game medium by starting winning detection means is detected, pending storing means to suspend storing variable display of the identification information start condition is not satisfied to allow a variable display start of the identification information (e.g., the first Japanese and FIG like holding storage unit 151A and the second Japanese view pending storage unit 151B), based on the establishment of the start condition, the variable display of the identification information which the start condition is satisfied it with a particular display result A pre-determining means determines whether the variable display of the identification information (e.g., a portion CPU103 performs the special symbol normal processing in step S110), based on a determination result of the pre-determination means, identification information ( Variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) that variably displays a display result and displays the display result (for example, an image display device 5), and displays on the variable display means based on the determination result of the prior determination means As a result, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big winning gaming state) advantageous to the player when the specific display result (for example, a decisive decorative symbol of the big winning combination) is derived and displayed. ) comprising: based on a determination result of the pre-determination means, during the variable display of the identification information as a target of the determination, the display result is the Japanese A specific display result confirmation notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the control result in step S555) executes a specific display result determination notification effect (for example, a jackpot confirmation notification effect) for notifying that a display result is obtained. processing and the like portions for performing), the holding storage means whether the variable display of the variable display identification information which becomes the specified display result of the identification information stored is included, and, the identification information Hold determination means for determining whether or not the variable display of identification information that causes reach is included in the variable display (for example, the CPU 103 uses the processing in steps S204 and S215 to determine the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type Numeric data indicating the random number value MR2 for determination and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are extracted, In the processing of steps S207 and S218, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost” based on the random value MR1, the big hit type is determined based on the random value MR2, and the random value MR3 Based on the determination result of the hold determination means, a part for determining whether or not to become “super reach loss”, a part for which the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of steps S586 and S607, and the like) Notification effect determining means (for example, effect) that determines whether or not to execute (for example, a first pre-reading effect or a second pre-reading effect including a first notification effect, a second notification effect, and a third notification effect). The control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S588 and S609) and the determination result of the notification effect determination means, and the specific table is displayed on the variable display means. After the results are derived displayed, the variable of the notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect (e.g. presentation control CPU120 and portions for performing the process of step S617), the identification information that is an execution target of the notification effect in the period of the display, the release effect execution means for executing a release effect of the variable display of the identification information notifying that a variable display of the identification information as a target of the notification effect (e.g. presentation control CPU120 is in step S554 A portion that executes the process of step S162 based on the determination result and the effect mode of the pre-reading effect), and the specific display result confirmation notification effect executing means executes the discharge effect by the discharge effect executing means. in the variable display of that identification information, restricting execution of before the specific display results confirm notification effect from the release effect is executed That (for example, when the effect control CPU120 is determined as Yes at step S822 is skipped and the process of determining whether to execute the big hit confirmation effect, or, variable display of the identification information emitted demonstration is executed Is characterized in that the jackpot confirmation notification effect is executed at a timing later than the release effect, or is controlled so that the release effect is executed instead of the jackpot determination notification effect).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display result confirmation notification effect from being executed when the release effect is executed, the effect effect of the release effect is improved, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

The notification effect executing means is determined when the notification effect determining means determines that the predetermined notification effect is to be executed based on the determination that the specific numerical data is included. The predetermined notification effect is executed in a different effect mode when the decision to execute the predetermined notification effect is made based on the determination that the predetermined numerical data is included (for example, When the special figure display result is “big hit” and the hold data with the big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” is stored, a pre-reading effect using a dog or cat character is executed. In the case where the special figure display result is “losing” and holding data with super reach is stored, a pre-reading effect using a cat character may be executed).
According to such a structure, the expectation degree which becomes a specific display result can be alert | reported with the production | presentation aspect of alerting | reporting effect, the effect of an effect improves and the interest of a game improves.

When the notification effect executing means determines that the predetermined notification effect is to be executed based on the determination that the specific numerical data is included by the notification effect determining means, The predetermined notification effect is continuously executed using first notification means (for example, the big hit hold display lamp 1001) during a period from the start of the notification effect to the execution of the release effect, When it is determined by the notification effect determining means that the predetermined notification data is included, the execution of the predetermined notification effect is started. Until the execution of the release effect, the second notification means (for example, the high expectation hold display lamp 1002) different from the first notification means is used for the predetermined period. It may be executed to continue the intellectual production.
According to such a structure, the expectation degree which becomes a specific display result can be alert | reported by which alerting | reporting effect is performed by which alerting | reporting means, the effect of an effect improves and the interest of a game improves.

The notification effect determining means prohibits determination of whether or not to execute the predetermined notification effect again for the right determined once by the notification effect determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps S631 and S641). If the pre-reading effect execution flag is determined to be “2”, the process of determining whether to execute the first pre-reading effect or the second pre-reading effect may be skipped). .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from being executed a plurality of times for the same right. When the number of reserved memories is large, the number of numerical data to be determined by the hold determining means increases, so that the number of objects to be determined as to whether or not to perform the notification effect increases. The execution ratio of the notification effect can be made constant regardless of the number of reserved memories.

As the specific game state, a first specific game state (for example, a 2-round jackpot state) and a second specific game state (for example, a 7-round jackpot state or a 16-round jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game state). And the hold determination means determines that the specific numerical data is included in the numerical data stored in the hold storage means. It is further determined whether it corresponds to the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state (for example, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type in the processing of steps S207 and S218). The notification effect determining means includes specific numerical data corresponding to the second specific gaming state being set by the hold determining means. When determined, it is determined that the predetermined notification effect is to be executed (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines Yes in step S586, the processes of steps S587 and S588 are executed, and step S607 is performed. When it is determined as Yes in step S608, the processing of steps S608 and S609 is executed), or it is determined by the hold determination means that specific numerical data corresponding to the first specific gaming state is included. It is determined that the predetermined notification effect is executed differently between when it is determined and when it is determined that specific numerical data corresponding to the second specific gaming state is included. Also good.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification effect and the release effect for the second specific gaming state advantageous to the player, or to change the type of the notification effect depending on the type of the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations for the first specific gaming state that is not advantageous to the player.

When the variable display of the identification information is stored on hold in the hold storage means, a start time determination means for determining whether the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (for example, the CPU 103 performs step S207). , Part for executing the processing of S218) and prior notice effect executing means (for example, for effect control) for executing the advance notice effect before the variable display of the identification information subjected to the determination by the start time determining means is executed. CPU 120 performs the process of step S504) and the advance notice effect execution means by the advance notice effect execution means until the variable display of all the identification information determined by the hold determination means is completed. Advance notice effect prohibiting means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S832 and S837) that prohibits the execution of It may be provided in et.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed during a period when the variable display of the identification information of the identification information that is the target of the notification effect is likely to be started. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to execute a notification effect or a prior notice effect, it is possible to prevent a situation where it is difficult to recognize which identification information variable display is being executed, and to improve the interest of the game. Can do.

The start winning device includes a first start winning device (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A) that forms a first start winning port through which a game medium can enter, and a first state in which the game medium can enter and an inaccessible state. And a second start winning device (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B) that forms a second start winning opening that can be changed to the second state, and the start winning detecting means includes the first start winning device. First start winning detection means (for example, the first start opening switch 22A) that detects the game medium that has entered the mouth, and second start winning detection means (for example, the game medium that has entered the second start winning opening) The numerical value data extracting means is configured to detect the game medium based on detection of the game medium by the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means. Numerical data After the specific game state is extracted, the special game is controlled to a special game state (for example, a probable change state) having a higher entry frequency to the second start winning opening than the normal game state (for example, the normal state). State control means (e.g., a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S313) is further provided, and the notification effect determining means is configured such that when the special game state is controlled, the hold determination means indicates that the specific numerical data is When it is determined that it is included, the predetermined notification effect is at a lower rate than when the hold determination unit determines that the specific numerical data is included when the normal gaming state is controlled. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the first prefetch effect execution determination table 161A in the process of step S588. Thus, the presence / absence of the first pre-reading effect may be determined by determining the presence / absence of the first pre-reading effect and referring to the second pre-reading effect execution determination table 161B in the process of step S609). .
According to such a configuration, when the normal gaming state is controlled, the number of numerical data stored in the on-hold storage means, and thus the specific numerical data, than when the special gaming state is controlled. However, in the above gaming machine, the proportion of the decision to execute the predetermined notification effect is increased accordingly. As a result, when the transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state is made, the notification effect can be effectively impressed in the same manner as when the special gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state.

In the variable display in which the release effect is executed by the release effect executing means, the specific display result determination / notification effect executing means prohibits the execution of the specific display result determination / notification effect or the release effect is executed. You may make it restrict | limit the execution of the said specific display result alerting | reporting effect by performing the said specific display result confirmation alerting | reporting effect at a predetermined timing later.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the release effect and the specific display result confirmation notification effect from being executed redundantly, improving the effect of the release effect and improving the entertainment of the game.

The specific display result confirmation notification effect executing means prohibits execution of the specific display result determination notification effect (for example, prohibition of jackpot confirmation notification effect execution) in variable display in which the release effect is executed by the release effect execution means. Or performing the specific display result confirmation notification effect at a predetermined timing after the release effect is executed (for example, prohibiting the execution of the jackpot confirmation notification effect after execution of the release effect). The execution of the specific display result notification effect may be limited.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the release effect and the specific display result confirmation notification effect from being executed redundantly, improving the effect of the release effect and improving the entertainment of the game.

The notification effect determining means is based on whether or not the specific numerical data is included in the numerical data held and stored in the hold storage means until the specific gaming state is started. First notification effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined notification effect (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step S588), and the reserved storage after the specific gaming state is started A second notification effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined notification effect based on whether or not the specific numerical data is included in the numerical data stored and stored in the means; For example, the production control CPU 120 may include a portion that executes the process of step S609).
According to such a configuration, not only before the control to the specific gaming state is started, but also about the specific numerical data stored and stored in the storage unit after the control to the specific gaming state is started. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of allowing the player to recognize that the specific numerical data is stored on hold in the hold storage means.

The second notification effect determining means determines that the predetermined notification effect is to be executed at a higher rate than the first notification effect determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the process in step S609). The presence / absence of the second prefetch effect may be determined by referring to the second prefetch effect execution determination table 161B).
According to such a configuration, since the second notification effect determining means performs the determination to execute the predetermined notification effect at a higher rate than the first notification effect determining means, after the specific gaming state is started. It is possible to more impress a predetermined notification effect that is executed based on specific numerical data stored and stored in the storage device.

The notification effect executing means uses the predetermined notification means (for example, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000) during a period from the execution of the predetermined notification effect to the execution of the release effect. The notification effect (for example, the second notification effect) may be continuously executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify that the right to enter the specific gaming state is reserved by the notification means, and thus it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

The display device further includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S270 to S272), and the variable display pattern determining means displays the identification information variablely. When starting, the variable display pattern is determined (for example, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S270 to S272), and the release effect executing means is executed when starting the variable display of the identification information. The type of release effect may be determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S554 of the decorative symbol variation setting process).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine the variable display pattern and the type of release effect according to the situation when the variable display is started (for example, the number of reserved memories and the game state), and effective release. Production can be performed.

The variable display pattern determination unit determines the variable display pattern when the determination by the hold determination unit is executed (for example, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern type and a variation pattern in steps S204 and S215). The release effect executing means determines the type of the release effect to be executed before starting the variable display of the identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the prefetch result). After the command is received, before the change corresponding to the prefetch result notification command is started, the execution timing and the production mode of the production effect may be determined).
According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be prefetched before the variable display is started, and the processing load at the start of the variable display can be reduced.

In the above gaming machine, the numerical data extraction means is in a specific gaming state as the predetermined numerical data based on detection of a game medium by the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means. A random number for determining a specific gaming state (for example, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result) for determining whether to shift, and a random number for determining a variable display for determining a variable display pattern of identification information (for example, The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type) is extracted, and the prior determination means, based on the establishment of the start condition, the numerical data corresponding to the right that the start condition is satisfied Among them, the numerical data indicating the specific gaming state determination random number is read, and whether or not the read numerical data indicating the specific gaming state determination random number is the specific numerical data By determining, whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state is determined before the display result derivation display, and the determination result of the prior determination means and the hold storage means stored when the variable display start condition is satisfied Based on the stored number, the value of the numerical data indicating the random number for determining variable display extracted by the numerical data extraction means, and the determination values corresponding to the plurality of types of variable display patterns, the variable display pattern of the identification information (for example, fluctuation A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process of step S111), and the variable display means is based on a determination result of the variable display pattern determining means. The variable display of the identification information is executed, and the hold determination unit is configured to perform the first start before the determination by the variable display pattern determination unit. Whether the value of the numerical data indicating the specific gaming state determination random number extracted by the numerical data extraction means is the specific numerical data when the game medium is detected by the prize detection means or the second start winning detection means Based on whether or not to determine whether to shift to a specific gaming state, it corresponds to the value of the numerical data indicating the random number for variable display determination extracted by the numerical data extraction means, and a plurality of types of variable display patterns Based on the determination value, it is determined whether or not the variable display pattern of the identification information is a specific variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) among a plurality of types of variable display patterns, and the notification effect The execution means is determined to be a case where it is determined by the hold determination means to shift to a specific gaming state or a specific variable display pattern is determined. The predetermined notification effect can be executed before the start condition for the variable display of the identification information as the determination target is satisfied, and at least a part of the determination value corresponding to the specific variable display pattern is The same determination value is set regardless of the number of reserved storage stored by the storage device when the variable display start condition is satisfied, and the determination value corresponding to the non-specific variable display pattern different from the specific variable display pattern is: Different determination values are set according to the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means when the variable display start condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, the total number of reserved memories is Regardless of whether it is 0 to 2 or 3 or more, 230 to 2 for the variation pattern type CA2-4 including the variation patterns PA3-1, PA3-2, PB3-1, PB3-2 with super reach. Determining values of one range are assigned. Different variation values are assigned to variation pattern types including variation patterns with non-reach and normal reach other than super reach depending on whether the total number of pending storage is 0 to 2 or 3 or more. The non-specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern in which the reach state is not established. The variable display from the start of variable display of identification information to the display of the display result in comparison with the specific variable display pattern The variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern for shortening that has a short time. Compared to the case where the number is less than the predetermined number, the variable display pattern is determined using the determination value set with a large number of determination values corresponding to the variable display pattern for shortening. The hold determination means determines whether or not a specific variable display pattern is obtained by determining whether or not the value of the numerical data indicating the variable display determination random number extracted by the numerical data extraction means matches the same determination value. Determine whether.
In the gaming machine, when the game medium is detected by the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means before the determination by the variable display pattern determination means, the specific game state determination extracted by the numerical data extraction means is performed. Based on whether or not the value of the numerical data indicating the random number for use is specific numerical data, it is determined whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state, and the variable display determination random number extracted by the numerical data extraction means is Whether or not the variable display pattern of the identification information is a specific variable display pattern among the plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the value of the numerical data shown and the determination values corresponding to the plurality of types of variable display patterns. The hold determination means for determining and the case where it is determined by the hold determination means to shift to the specific gaming state or a specific variable display pattern is determined. In this case, the first embodiment is provided with notification effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect before the start condition for variable display of the identification information to be determined is satisfied. Prior to the variable display corresponding to the detection of the game medium by the start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means (for example, start winning etc.), the transition to the specific gaming state or the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed. Can be notified, and the interest in games can be improved. In addition, the determination result of the pre-determination unit, the number of reserved storages stored by the storage unit when the variable display start condition is satisfied, and the value of numerical data indicating the random number for variable display determination extracted by the numerical data extraction unit And variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of identification information based on determination values corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns, and at least one of determination values corresponding to a specific variable display pattern The determination value corresponding to a non-specific variable display pattern that is different from a specific variable display pattern is set regardless of the number of reserved storage stored by the storage unit when the variable display start condition is satisfied. Is set to a different determination value according to the number of reserved storage stored by the storage device when the variable display start condition is satisfied, and the non-specific variable display pattern It is a variable display pattern in which the reach state is not established, and includes a variable display pattern for shortening the variable display time from the start of variable display of identification information compared to the specific variable display pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, The variable display pattern determining means is compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number when the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the variable display start condition is satisfied is greater than or equal to the predetermined number. Since the variable display pattern is determined using a determination value set with a large number of determination values corresponding to the variable display pattern for shortening, variable display is performed according to the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means. By varying the time, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation in which the variable display operating rate decreases.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a symbol display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a promotion effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a prefetch effect execution determination table. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the setting of a prefetch process flag. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the prefetch effect execution timing determination table. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command process at the time of a start winning prize. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a variable display prefetch notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a final stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of discharge | release effect setting processing. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a big hit decision alerting | reporting effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process during jackpot control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process during jackpot control. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the effect process during jackpot control. It is a figure which shows the other example of a high expectation holding | maintenance display lamp.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping the variable display by displaying the identification information such as decorative symbols in a stopped manner (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display).

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a decorative symbol (a symbol composed of the characters “Accuracy”) corresponding to a “probable big hit” (also referred to as “2R probable big hit”) described later, or a blank A symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, in this embodiment, when performing the hold memory display, the number of special figure hold memories based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition. When it is not possible to specify whether the condition is the second start condition, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray. change.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including. A high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The high expectation hold display lamp 1000 has a special figure display result of “big hit” with a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or a special figure display result of “losing” and a fluctuation with super reach. Is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening. Normally open. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state. Easy to open and open. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not satisfied, variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). The added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be the total reserved memory number or the special figure reserved memory number.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, the symbols indicating “−”, and the like as normal symbols. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate. The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. The operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or may be capable of being pressed and tilted like a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation button 30 only needs to be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 30 is detected by the operation detection switch 31 shown in FIG.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, “big hit” is obtained as a specific display result, and if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “lost” is displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a different special symbol from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is the 7-round jackpot symbol, and “7” A special symbol indicating a number is a 16-round jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating a number “1” is a 2-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (16 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific gaming state controlled after the 16 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. A round game for changing to the first state advantageous to the player is executed. In this way, the opening and closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 7 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the 16 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the open cycle of the big winning opening, is the first round number (for example, “16”). A game in the 16 round big hit state in which the number of executions of the round game is “16” is also referred to as a 16-time open game. In such a 16-round big hit state, every time a game ball wins a big winning opening, 15 balls are obtained. The 16 round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit gaming state (7 round big hit state) as the middle round specific gaming state controlled after the 7 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. A round game for changing to the first state advantageous to the player is executed. In this way, the opening and closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 7 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the 7 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the open cycle of the big winning opening, becomes the second round number (for example, “7”) smaller than the first round number in the 16 round big hit state. A game in a 7-round big hit state in which the number of executions of the round game is “7” is also referred to as a 7-time open game. In such a 7-round big hit state, every time a game ball wins a big winning opening, 15 balls are obtained. The 7 round round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  After a decisive decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, during a round in the jackpot gaming state, during the period from the end of one round in the jackpot gaming state to the start of the next round, etc. The jackpot promotion effect that is a notification effect of whether the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is “7” or “16” is executed. In the jackpot promotion promotion, there is a promotion with a round number of “16”, and there is no promotion with a jackpot promotion to notify that the jackpot gaming state will continue, and there is no promotion with a round number of “16”, 7 rounds There is a big hit promotion promotion effect that notifies that the big hit gaming state is ended. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the player can recognize whether or not the promotion has a round number of “16”. do it.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round game. A second period (for example, 0) in which the period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening and closing plate) is shorter than the first period in the 16 round big hit state or the 7 round big hit state. .5 seconds). In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round game becomes a third round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 16 round big hit state and the second round number in the 7 round big hit state. In the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round game to be the second round number, and other control is performed in the same manner as the 16 round big hit state and the 7 round big hit state. Also good. A game in a two round big hit state in which the number of executions of the round game is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In a two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round game, by changing a predetermined winning port serving as a big winning port from a closed state to an open state, etc. Alternatively, the state may be changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and then returned to the second state after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed.

  In such a two-round big win state, if a game ball wins a big winning opening, 15 balls will be obtained, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds) Short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a game is not substantially obtained. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. The big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round games executed as compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. While the specific game state, the middle round specific game state, and the multi-round specific game state are the same, in the low-round specific game state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big winning opening is the multi-round specific game state. Or, it may be shorter than the upper limit period (for example, 29 seconds) in the middle round specific game state. That is, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is the second period in which the period for changing the big prize opening to the open state in each round game is shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state or the middle round specific gaming state And at least one of the number of round games being executed is a third round number that is less than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state and the second round number in the middle round specific gaming state, and What is necessary.

  A 7-round jackpot symbol will be displayed after the 7-round jackpot state ends, or after a special symbol showing the number “3”, which is a 7-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special chart game. The special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two-round big hit symbol after the 16-round big hit state has ended after the special symbol showing the number is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game After the two-round jackpot state has ended based on the fact that it has been stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the game, as one of the special gaming states, the special symbol variable display time in the special symbol game (the special symbol variable time) ) Is shortened, and the probability variation state in which probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed is controlled.

  Here, the normal state is a normal game state as a game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a short-time state, or a probability change state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. On the other hand, the time-saving state is when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) a special-figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is met first. You just have to finish. Also, in the probability variation state, the variable display result in each special figure game and decorative symbol variable display will be “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. improves. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) a special game is executed.

  Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, a 7-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to a probable change state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is ended. Like the special symbol indicating the number “”, the 16-round big-hit symbol that is controlled to be probable after the big-hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special-figure game is called a probable big-hit symbol. Is done. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. In addition, the fact that the 7-round big hit symbol out of the probability variable big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is referred to as “7R probability big hit”. The fact that the 16-round big hit symbol out of the probable big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “16R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 7-round jackpot symbol “3”, the 16-round jackpot symbol “7”, and the 2-round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the certain change state or the short time state.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (big hit reliability) Becomes higher.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the decorative symbol display area 5C of “middle” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. By temporarily stopping display of decorative symbols different from the symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the temporary combination is temporarily stopped at a combination that causes a loss, and then the “medium” decorative symbol is resumed to be a big hit combination. There is a case where a relief effect is executed. In the relief effect, a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, a display mode of the background image is changed, or a moving image different from the decorative design There is a case where an effect operation is performed in which an image is reproduced and displayed, or a variation pattern of a decorative design is changed. In this embodiment, the relief effect A and the relief effect B having different effect modes can be executed. Note that the relief effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Good.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 of a predetermined special combination are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of combinations of lost is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Thereby, the player can recognize that the specific effect of the “pseudo-ream” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-ream chances GC1 to GC8, and as the number of times of the pseudo-ream fluctuation increases. In addition, the expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, one that is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is 1 It may be controlled to increase one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled. As another example, the movable member provided inside or outside the game area may be controlled to operate during each fluctuation display (including the first fluctuation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. . As yet another example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during the period of each change display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, among the lighting and blinking of the decorative LED, the operation of the movable member, the display of the effect image, Control may be performed so as to execute a re-variation effect combining a part or all of them. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. When the production mode changes in, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” or the “15R probability variable big hit” may be increased.

  The production operation executed as the re-variation production may include any production operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9. Also, for example, differences in the output of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, differences in the movement of the production target object (for example, a movable member, etc.) (difference in operating speed, difference in operating distance, difference in operating direction, etc.) Depending on the movement of the character image displayed on the display device 5 (difference in movement speed, difference in movement distance, difference in movement direction, etc.) Instead of changing the character display or changing the display of the background image, the effect mode in the re-change effect may be made different. Further, in addition to the re-variation effect executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped, for example, audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped and displayed by an arbitrary production operation such as the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9.

  In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and after changing the decorative symbol again, stop display. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  In addition to “pseudo-ream” and “slip”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. , The player's expectation is enhanced. Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped temporarily for the decorative combination (special combination) that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. After the display, unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the effect display that changes the decorative symbol to be stopped by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. Notifying the player that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “character notice” and “operation notice” are set to be executable. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the notice effect of “Character notice”, an effect display is performed in which a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during variable display of the decorative symbols. Here, as the display of the character image, a character image that is separate from the decorative design may be displayed statically or in motion (animation display), or a character image that is variably displayed integrally with the decorative design. The display may be an operation display (animation display) in a display form different from the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  In the notice effect of “notice at the time of operation”, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5 in response to the player performing a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the operation button 30 while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The production operation is changed by changing the display of the production image or changing the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As an example, in the notice effect of “notice at the time of operation”, a predetermined effect operation serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of a decorative symbol. In the button operation promotion effect, for example, an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby prompting the player to operate the operation button 30. Any production operation may be used. The effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is not limited to the effect display of the effect image on the image display device 5, and the game effect lamp 9 that outputs predetermined sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or lighting the LED for decoration in a predetermined lighting pattern, or operating a movable member provided in a rendering accessory provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or any of these May be combined. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is set. When the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected by the operation detection switch 31 within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and prepared in advance, for example. One of the plurality of types of effect images is displayed on the image display device 5, and the sound effect corresponding to one of the plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance is displayed on the speaker 8L. Various effects such as output from 8R are executed.

  As the notice effect by the effect operation different from the variable display operation of such decorative symbols, various effect operations such as “step-up operation” can be executed in addition to “character notice” and “operation notice”. Good. Here, in the notice effect of “step-up operation”, as an example, a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of decorative symbols. An effect operation may be performed such that the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages by the effect display. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched. Further, as another example of the notice effect of the “step-up operation”, there are a plurality of types of movable members provided in the effect accessory provided inside or outside the game area during the variable display of the decorative design according to a predetermined order. An effect operation in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages may be performed by the effect operation operated in the operation mode. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after the movable member performs the effect operation in one type of operation, the effect operation in the notice effect may be terminated without switching to the effect operation of the second stage. There may be. As described above, the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is executed in response to one start prize (that one game ball has entered the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening). This is a kind of notice effect that is executed during variable display of symbols and decorative designs, and is a step-up notice effect that changes the notice style (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) in multiple stages (steps up). . In general, the greater the number of changes (number of steps), the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). In addition, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode in each step, at least one of “15R probability variation big hit” and “2R probability variation big hit”, or a specific reach effect is executed. Or one of them. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol “3” that becomes the 7-round jackpot symbol and the special symbol “7” that becomes the 16-round jackpot symbol are stopped and displayed as the special symbols to be confirmed in the special game, In response to the variable display state having reached the reach state, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol that is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is the determined decorative symbol that becomes the big hit combination. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Anything is acceptable.

  In addition, after the decorative symbol for the big hit combination is derived and displayed, the first special figure holding storage unit 151A (FIG. 11) and the second special figure holding storage unit 151B (FIG. 11) are being executed during the round in the big hit gaming state. ) Is stored on hold data with a special figure display result of “Big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or a special figure display result of “Lose” with super reach. A pre-reading effect for informing the user is executed. In this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect image in which a dog or cat character appears as part of the jackpot effect including the promotion effect during execution of the round in the jackpot game state. The Then, the image display device 5 displays an effect image in which the dog or cat character is sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000, and in response to the dog or cat character jumping in, the high expectation hold display lamp An effect operation for lighting 1000 is executed. In addition, if the special figure display result is “big hit” and the hold data with the big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” is stored, a dog or cat character is used and the special figure display is made. If the result is “losing” and pending data with super reach is stored, a cat character is used. As a result, the pre-reading effect is a right that the special figure display result is “big hit” (when the pre-reading effect is executed by the dog character), or a right that has a high probability that the special figure display result is “big hit” ( When the pre-reading effect by the cat character is executed), the effect is as if it was stocked. After that, when variable display corresponding to the hold data for which the pre-reading effect is executed is executed, the lit high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off, and the special figure display result becomes “big hit”. A release effect to be notified is executed. As a result, the release effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the stock of the right whose special figure display result is “big hit” has been released. Special data display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. When all the hold data that has been executed is digested, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off, and the effect operation that becomes the pre-read effect is ended.

  In addition to the pre-reading effect in the big hit gaming state, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A (FIG. 11) and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B (FIG. 11). In addition, there is a case where a variable display pre-reading notice for notifying that reserved data whose special figure display result is “big hit” is stored is executed. In this embodiment, when hold data whose special figure display result is “big hit” is stored, the corresponding hold memory display in the start winning memory display area 5H is different from the normal display mode (circular). Variable display pre-reading notice in a variable display mode (star shape or sun shape) is executed. The presentation mode of the pre-reading notice during variable display is not limited to this, and the display color of the corresponding on-hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H is different, or the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Display different character images (effect images simulating people), change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image different from the decorative design, or change the variation mode of the decorative design It may be a thing. In addition to the display operation in the image display device 5, a sound output operation by the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, a lighting operation (flashing operation) in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be included.

  In addition, during variable display when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit confirmation is made in advance to notify that the special figure display result becomes “big hit” before the special figure display result becomes “big hit”. A notification effect may be executed. The big hit confirmation notification effect is, for example, that the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined lighting manner at a timing before the display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is derived, thereby notifying that it is a “hit”. Production. Note that the jackpot confirmation notification effect is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by displaying a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design, changing the display mode of the background image, May be used to reproduce and display different moving images, or to change the variation of the decorative pattern. Further, not only the display operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the image display device 5, but also an audio output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R may be included. In addition, in the variable display in which the release effect is executed, when this jackpot confirmation notification effect is executed, the effect of the release effect is diminished, and therefore execution of the jackpot determination notification effect is limited.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the result of prior determination as to whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, different EXT data is set in accordance with the big hit type determination result indicating whether the decorative display variable display mode (big hit type) is “7 rounds”, “16 rounds”, or “2 rounds”. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2 rounds”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect control command for setting EXT data corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (one of “losing” and “big hit” and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”) is prepared. Then, information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result.

  The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. With the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening or the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 16 round big hit state, or the big winning in the two round big hit state or the variable winning operation Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the jackpot gaming state, regardless of whether the jackpot is in the open state or whether the jackpot is changed from the open state to the closed state, from the start of the jackpot gaming state, Or you may make it perform a continuous production | presentation operation | movement from the time of the variable display start of a decorative design to the time of the end of a big hit game state. Alternatively, in the big hit gaming state, different presentation operations are executed depending on whether the big winning opening is in an open state or the big winning opening is in a period in which it has changed from an open state to a closed state. It may be.

  Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  The command B100H is generated by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first starting port switch 22A detects the game ball that has entered (started winning) the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that a first start condition for executing a special figure game using one special figure has been established. The command B200H is generated by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (started winning) the second starting winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting port switch 22B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established.

  The command C0XXH is used to display the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A and the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The command D0XXH is a prefetch result notification command for notifying a prefetch result from the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B (FIG. 11). Here, prefetching refers to reading the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A or the second special figure hold storage unit 151B before the special figure game based on the hold data is started. Say.

  In the prefetch result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3C, the special figure included in the hold data prefetched from the first special figure hold storage unit 151A or the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Whether the variable display result determined based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the display result is “big hit” or “losing”, or based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type Different EXT data is set according to whether the big hit type is “7 rounds”, “16 rounds”, or “2 rounds”. More specifically, the command D000H is a first prefetching result notification command indicating a prefetching result indicating that the variable display result is “losing” and superreach is not achieved (losing without reach or normal reach losing). The command D001H is a second prefetching result notification command indicating a prefetching result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. The command D002H is a third prefetching result notification command indicating a prefetching result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2 rounds”. The command D003H is a first prefetch result notification command indicating a prefetch result indicating that the variable display result is “lost” and the super reach is reached. Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the prefetch content notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received and the prefetch result is specified. Can do. In addition, when the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop is executed when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, Notify the reserved memory count notification command for notifying the total reserved memory count, and the prefetch result from the first special figure reserved storage section 151A and the second special figure reserved storage section 151B (FIG. 11) at the previous power supply stop. The prefetch result notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control, so that the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) executes the following ( Specifically, this means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  In the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random number value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Also, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are not separately independent, for example, the special figure display result The random number value MR1 for determination and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be integrated such as having shared numerical value data or shared determined value data. . In addition, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type have a single numerical value data or a single determination value data. It may be.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 103 as a random counter. It may be updated by software using Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is any one of “7 rounds”, “16 rounds”, and “2 rounds” as the jackpot type that is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”. This is a random value used for determination, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR3 is in the range of “1” to “251”. Takes the value of The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used for determining the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 is a value in the range of “1” to “997”. Take. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “150”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state where the game ball is difficult to enter the normal start-up winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open state). ) Is used to determine whether or not to change to a state in which a game ball is likely to enter (expanded open state).

  FIG. 5 shows a decorative pattern variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”. Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 are prepared in advance as non-reach variation patterns. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. As the hit variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, A fluctuation pattern PB4-2, a fluctuation pattern PA5-1, a fluctuation pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As the hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2 rounds”, the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-5 are prepared in advance.

  FIG. 6 shows the decorative pattern variation pattern type in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 5 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. In other words, each variation pattern type only needs to be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns by the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which a pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which a fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 6, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-4 are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and “variable” variable display mode, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display mode (big hit type) with the variable display result of “big hit” and “16 rounds”, the fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 are prepared in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of “no shortening” in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed. , A variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening” is included. For the variation pattern type CA1-2, for example, the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, and the time reduction control is performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the special symbol and the decorative symbol are variably displayed. It is a variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which the time is shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “with shortening”. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of “sliding, pseudo-continuous” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” or “sliding” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It includes a variation pattern previously associated with “slip, pseudo-ream”.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is ended with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream”. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of the reach combination, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous”. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is two times. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation twice” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of reach combination when the production is finished, and is associated with “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation twice” in advance. Variation patterns are included.

  In the variation pattern type CA2-3, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is one, and the normal display is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation once” that derives and displays a determined decorative symbol of reach combination when the production is finished, and is associated with “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation once” in advance. Variation patterns are included. Fluctuation pattern types CA2-4 are accompanied by super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state, and when the reach production ends, the definite decorative symbols of the reach combination are derived and displayed. The variation pattern type of “Super Reach (Lose)” is included, and includes a variation pattern associated with “Super Reach (Lose)” in advance.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a symbol, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous”. The variation pattern type CA3-1 includes a variation pattern in which a relief effect is executed after normal reach is reached. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-ream”. Fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 is a “super reach (big hit)” that displays a definite decorative symbol of a big hit combination when super reach is included after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and the reach effect is finished. It is a variation pattern type, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “super reach (big hit)”.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is one of the 2nd release chances TC1 to TC4. Are included in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are variation patterns in which the confirmed decorative symbol is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4, and the variation pattern type CA4. −1. In the variation pattern type CA4-2, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2 rounds”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is derived and displayed. The variation pattern type of “reach loss at the time of opening twice” includes a variation pattern associated with “reach loss at the time of release twice” in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns in which the determined decorative symbol is a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and decorative pattern variation patterns as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types is stored.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the symbol display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as a symbol display result determination table, a special symbol display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 7A and a general symbol display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 7B are prepared in advance. Yes. The special figure display result determination table 130A is variably displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as a “big hit” before the determined special symbol as a result is derived and displayed based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referred to. The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 11 is off or on. Is configured with setting data (determination data) that is associated (assigned) to jackpot determination value data and loss determination value data.

  In the ordinary figure display result determination table 130B, the comparison with the random number MR5 for determining the ordinary figure display result is made depending on whether the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 11 is off or on. The numerical value (judgment value) to be assigned is assigned to either the common figure judgment value data or the common figure loss judgment value data. The general map display result determination table 130B is for setting for setting the general map change time to one of a plurality of types corresponding to the determination result of whether or not the random number MR5 matches the determination value data per universal map. When the data or the random number MR5 matches the judgment value data per map, the time for performing tilt control (tilt control time) for allowing the game ball to easily enter the second start winning opening, and the time flag is OFF Data for setting for setting depending on whether it is present or on may be included.

  In the setting of the general map display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 7B, the random number value MR5 for determining the general map display result is any one of “1” to “15” corresponding to the case where the time reduction flag is off. In the meantime, the random value MR5 for determining the normal map display result is “1” to “140” corresponding to the case where the time flag is on. The determination value is allocated to the determination value data for the normal map and the determination value data for the general-purpose loss so that the determination value matches the determination value data for the normal map. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on corresponding to the probability change state or the time reduction state, the variable display result in the general game is “normal” compared to when the time reduction flag is off corresponding to the normal state. The probability of “per figure” is increased, and the frequency of tilt control for making the second start winning opening enter a state where the game ball can easily enter can be increased. Further, the normal time fluctuation times TH3 and TH4 corresponding to when the time reduction flag is on are set shorter than the normal time fluctuation times TH1 and TH2 corresponding to when the time reduction flag is off. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on corresponding to the probability change state or the time reduction state, the normal time fluctuation time in the normal game is shorter than when the time reduction flag is off corresponding to the normal state. Thus, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the tilt control is performed so that the game ball can easily win the second start winning opening. Further, the tilt control time TK2 corresponding to the time reduction flag being on is set longer than the tilt control time TK1 corresponding to the time reduction flag being off. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening than when it is off. In addition, when the time reduction flag is turned on corresponding to the probability change state or the time reduction state, the second time can be obtained by increasing the number of times tilt control is performed compared to when the time reduction flag is off corresponding to the normal state. You may make it easier to enter the game ball into the start winning opening.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 is variably displayed based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big jackpot” and control is made to the jackpot game state. This table is referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “7 rounds”, “16 lands”, and “2 rounds”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 11 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to the jackpot type such as “7 rounds”, “16 lands”, “2 rounds”, and the like. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, and the second special symbol display device 4B sets the second special symbol display device 4B. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the big hit type determination table 131, the table data indicating the decision values assigned to a plurality of types of big hit types determines whether to control the 7 round big hit state, the 16 round big hit state, or the 2 round big hit state. It is data for decision corresponding to the result. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “7 round” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 7 round jackpot state, and the decision value assigned to the “16 round” jackpot type. Table data corresponding to the determination result that the 16 round round big hit state is controlled, while the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “2 round” big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state It corresponds to the decision result. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 8, the allocation of the determined value to each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the big hit type of “16 rounds”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer When the value is “2”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned. For the big hit type of “2 rounds”, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “100” is assigned, while the variable special figure designation buffer value is In the case of “2”, no decision value is assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 8, the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to control the big hit type as “2 rounds” and control to the two round big hit state. With such settings, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening with high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is “2 rounds” and almost no prize ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to the two round round big hit state, and to suppress the decline of the game interest due to the delay in the game in the short-time state or the probability variation state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed with priority over the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device in the short-time state or the probability variation state. Since the frequency with which the special figure game in 4B is executed is increased, such a setting has a great effect of suppressing the decline in the gaming interest. In addition to this setting, the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A. It is possible to improve the game entertainment by increasing the ratio of the round hit state or the 16 round hit state.

  Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, for example, a smaller decision value than that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” is obtained for the special figure display result of “2 rounds”. It may be assigned. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state, if the big hit type is “2 rounds” and the game shifts to the probable change state after the end of the two round big hit state, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Therefore, when the gaming state is the short-time state, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type determination table is assigned so that the determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “2 rounds”. The table data in 131 may be configured. Further, in this embodiment, the degree of advantage between the 7 round big hit state and the 16 round big hit state is made different depending on the number of round games executed, but the degree of advantage is made different depending on the open state of the big prize opening. May be. As an example, a 15-round jackpot game with a short opening time of the big prize opening and a 15-round jackpot game with a long opening time of the big prize opening are provided. In the big hit type determination table 131, the variable special figure designation buffer value is “ Depending on whether it is “1” or “2”, a decision is made on the jackpot type of “15 rounds with a short opening time of the big prize opening” and the jackpot type of “15 rounds with a long opening time of the big prize opening” What is necessary is just to change value assignment.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. 3 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in a ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal use) 132B shown in FIG. A loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132C shown in FIG. 9C is prepared in advance.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “7 rounds”, “16 rounds”, or “2 rounds”. Are assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, the variation pattern type CA4-1, and the variation pattern type CA4-2.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the decision value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA3-3, while the fluctuation pattern type CA4. No determination value is assigned to -1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “2 rounds”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1. No determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to “2 rounds”, the variation pattern type is different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. Can be determined.

  If the jackpot type is determined to be “7 rounds”, “16 rounds”, or “2 rounds”, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the short-time state, or the probability variation state Depending on, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. In addition, when the big hit type is determined to be “7 rounds”, “16 rounds”, or “2 rounds”, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probability variation state Depending on the case, the decision values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  The loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132C determine the change pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “lost”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used when the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened, for example, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of reserved memories is less than “3”. Selected as the table used. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is special when, for example, the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more even in the normal state. It is selected as a use table when the variable display time of symbols and decorative symbols is shortened.

  Note that the variation pattern type is determined by referring to different determination tables when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state and when the gaming state is a normal state and the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more. You may be made to be. Further, the variation pattern type may be determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether or not the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number other than “3” or not. Furthermore, when the total number of reserved memories is “0”, when the total number of reserved memories is “1”, when the total number of reserved memories is “2”, the total number of reserved memories is “3”. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to different determination tables when there is a certain number and when the total number of reserved memories is “4”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is less than “3”, the variation pattern type is determined with reference to a common determination table, while the total number of reserved memories is “3”. The change pattern type may be determined by referring to a different determination table when the total number of reserved memories is “4”. Alternatively, instead of the total number of reserved memories, the variation pattern type is determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are equal to or greater than a predetermined number. You may do it. In this case, when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3” or the like), the variation pattern type includes a variation pattern that has a shorter variable display time than when it is less than the predetermined number. It suffices that the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to be higher. Alternatively, even when the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short time state, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and different determination tables are set according to the determination result. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to the reference. For example, if the total number of stored storages is less than a predetermined number in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is selected as the use table, while the probability variation state or the time reduction state exists. Sometimes, if the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D may be selected as the use table.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA1-. 1 to a variation pattern type CA1-3 and a variation pattern type CA2-1 to a variation pattern type CA2-4. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. There is a part. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation pattern type CA2-1 is different. . Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on whether or not the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, there are portions where determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 and the variation pattern type CA2-3, while the variation pattern type CA1-1 and the variation pattern A decision value is assigned to the type CA2-2. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 and the variation pattern type CA2-2, while the variation pattern type CA1-2 Further, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-3. Thereby, depending on whether or not the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types.

  When the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value for each variation pattern type depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the short-time state, or the probability variation state. The assignment may be different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value is set to a different variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state, or a probability variation state. It may be assigned. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  In this embodiment, by referring to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation The pattern type can be determined as any one of the pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. Here, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 correspond to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” as shown in FIG. 6B. It is a variation pattern type. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, by referring to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, It is possible to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state.

  The determination values assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 and the variation pattern type CA1-3 in the loss variation pattern type determination table (shortening) 132D are the variation patterns in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132C. It is larger than the determined value assigned to the type CA1-1 and the variation pattern type CA1-3. With such a setting, when the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened, it is determined that the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is not set to the reach state at a higher rate than when the variable symbol is not shortened. If the average variable display time in the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to be shorter than the average variable display time in the reach fluctuation pattern, the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number (specifically, “ 3 ") or more, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in the probabilistic state or the short time state, the total number of stored storages in the normal state As compared with the case where is less than a predetermined number (specifically, “3”), the average variable display time can be shortened.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 133A shown in FIG. 10A and a big hit variation pattern determination table 133B shown in FIG. 10B are prepared in advance as variation pattern determination tables.

  The loss variation pattern determination table 133A is based on the random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “lost”. Or, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-3 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 5, the variation pattern PA1-3 is a variation pattern in which a variable display effect of “slip” is executed when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable pattern effect such as “slip” is executed by being determined by the variation pattern PA1-3. Can do. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-4 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 5, when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variation pattern PA1-4 has a pseudo continuous variation (revariation) with a variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”. ) Is executed once. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed by being determined as the variation pattern PA1-4. Can do.

  Note that the ratio determined for the variation pattern for executing the variable display effect may be different depending on whether the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened. As an example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132B shown in FIG. 9B, a smaller determination value is changed compared to the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132C shown in FIG. 9C. It may be assigned to the pattern types CA1-3. In the setting example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 5, the special pattern variation time (variable display time of the special symbol) in the variation pattern PA1-1 in which the variable display effect such as “pseudo ream” or “slip” is not executed is 12000 milliseconds [ ms], the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is set to 3000 milliseconds [ms]. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 for executing the variable display effect of “pseudo” is 16000 milliseconds [ms] in the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 for executing the variable display effect of “slip”. The special figure fluctuation time at is set to 24000 [ms]. That is, when the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the special pattern change time in the change pattern PA1-3 for executing the “slip” variable display effect, or the change pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. The special figure fluctuation time in PA1-4 is longer than the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern in which these variable display effects are not executed.

  For example, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “3”) or more, there is a variation pattern for executing variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” compared to a case where the total number is less than the predetermined number. A determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to the included variation pattern types CA1-3 is low. As a result, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Further, for example, in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-3 is larger than that in the normal state when the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (for example, “3”). A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so as to be lower. As a result, the average variable display time can be shortened when the probability change state or the time reduction state is set, compared to when the total number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number in the normal state.

  The jackpot variation pattern determination table 133B is based on the variation pattern determination random number MR4 according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc., when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In the big hit variation pattern determination table 133B, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “big hit”. Or, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (per variation pattern).

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  For example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 11 is provided in the RAM 102 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 11 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates with a holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening and sets the first start condition by the winning (game ball detection). Based on the establishment, numerical data indicating various random values extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 is set as pending data, and stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). In this embodiment, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A as the hold data.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates the holding number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and sets the second start condition by the winning (game ball detection). Based on the establishment, numerical data indicating various random values extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 is set as pending data, and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). In this embodiment, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B as holding data.

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the winning order of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151C stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening. The game balls are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In the step S15 of FIG. 18 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 19, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The normal symbol process flag is used to select / execute a process in step S16 of FIG. 18 or the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 26 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol indicator 20. Tell what to do.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being in the probability change state or the time reduction state and the time reduction control is started, while the probability change state or the time reduction state is ended. It is cleared and turned off in response to.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a variable symbol display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a short time counter, a probability variation counter, a round counter, and the like. Is provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104. This is for the CPU 103 to count the data so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR6 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter is used to count the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed until the time reduction control is ended when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a certain change state or a time reduction state. . As an example, when the jackpot gaming state ends, data indicating a count initial value “100” is set in the time reduction counter as a time reduction count value. Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is subtracted by 1 every time the special game is finished. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time change flag and the time reduction state are terminated by clearing the time reduction flag to turn it off, etc., and control to shift to the normal state is performed.

  The probability variation counter is used to count the number of remaining special game that can be executed until the probability variation control is finished when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state. As an example, in the probability variation counter, data indicating the initial count value “8” is set as the probability variation count value when the big hit gaming state ends. Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the probability variation count value is updated by 1 every time the special figure game ends. Then, when the probability variation count value reaches “0”, the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off, for example, so that the probability variation state is terminated and control is shifted to the time reduction state.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round game is finished and the next round game is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The hold fluctuation count counter is used to count the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the hold fluctuation in an identifiable manner.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating whether a game ball that has entered the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port is detected. As an example, “1” is set in the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, “2” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 8, if the jackpot type is “7 rounds”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” and the jackpot type is “16 rounds”. If this is the case, “1” is set to the jackpot type buffer value, and if the jackpot type is “2 rounds”, “2” is set to the jackpot type buffer value.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, while the production control CPU 120 is built in the production control microcomputer, at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the production control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may be any one that is built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, the effect control board 12 is also connected with wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 30 has been detected from an operation detection switch (not shown). ing.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. FIG. 12 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating the random value SR1 for determining the promotion effect pattern, numerical data indicating the random value SR2 for determining the pre-reading effect execution, The numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for the pre-reading effect execution determination timing, the random value SR4 for the variable display advance notice determination, the random value SR5 for determining the release effect execution timing, and the random value SR6 for determining the big hit confirmation notification effect execution The numerical data indicating each is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the final stop symbol used for determining a final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the decorative symbol may be controlled to be countable.

  The effect control CPU 120 uses various random counters different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1 to SR6 may be counted. Alternatively, by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and calculation processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 124, numerical data indicating all or part of the rendering random number is updated. You may make it do. When the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 may count numerical data indicating all the effect random numbers using a random counter.

  The promotion effect pattern determination random value SR1 is a random value used for determining one of a plurality of types of promotion effect patterns corresponding to the contents of the promotion effect, and ranges from “1” to “71”. Takes a value.

  The random value SR2 for the pre-reading effect execution determination is that the special display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the variable display result is “lost”. Used to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect and the effect mode of the pre-reading effect when the pre-reading result that becomes super reach is stored in the pre-reading result holding storage unit 195 (FIG. 17). The random number value is a value in the range of “1” to “263”. The random value SR3 for determining the pre-reading effect execution timing is a random value used for determining the execution timing from one round to 16 rounds when executing the pre-reading effect. It takes a value in the range of “200”.

  The random value SR4 for determining the notice during variable display is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the notice during variable display based on the pre-read result in which the special figure display result is “big hit”. Yes, and takes values in the range of “1” to “100”. The random number SR5 for determining the release effect execution timing is a random value used for determining the timing for executing the release effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The random value SR6 for determining whether or not to execute the big hit confirmation notification effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the big hit confirmation notification effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the promotion effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. The promotion effect pattern determination table 160 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the promotion effect pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the random effect value SR1 for determining the promotion effect pattern. In the promotion effect pattern determination table 160, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR1 for promotion effect pattern determination is promoted according to whether the jackpot type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. It is assigned to one of the promotion effect patterns of SP1 to promotion SP3.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of a prefetch effect execution determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as the pre-reading effect execution determination determination table, the first pre-reading effect execution determination table (at the time of big hit) 161A shown in FIG. 14A and the first pre-reading effect execution shown in FIG. 14B. A determination table (at the time of a loss) 161B, a second prefetch effect execution determination table (at the time of a big hit) 161C shown in FIG. 14C, and a second prefetch effect execution determination table (at the time of a loss) shown in FIG. 161D is prepared in advance.

  The first pre-reading effect execution determination table (at the time of big hit) 161A is a pre-read result in which the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” at the start of the big hit gaming state. Is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit 195 (FIG. 17), whether or not to execute the first pre-reading effect or the pre-reading effect mode (whether the dog character appears or the cat character Is a table that is referred to for determining based on the random value SR2 for determining the pre-reading effect. In the first pre-reading effect execution determination table (at the time of big hit) 161A, whether the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state or the short time state, for example, an effect control flag setting unit 191 In accordance with the value of the prefetch process flag provided in the value, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value SR2 for determining the prefetch effect is determined as to whether the first prefetch effect is executed or not. Is assigned to the determination result of the production mode. Here, the prefetch process flag indicates whether or not a prefetch effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 15, an effect image in which a pre-read effect is started and a dog or cat character appears is an image. When displayed on the display device 5, the value is updated to "1". When the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off and the pre-reading effect is finished, the value is updated to “2”, and the jackpot gaming state controlled following the turn off of the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is finished. When this occurs, the value is updated to “0”.

  The first pre-reading effect execution determination table (at the time of losing) 161B is a pre-reading result holding storage unit 195 (FIG. 17) at the start of the big hit gaming state where the special figure display result is “lost” and the pre-reading result with super reach. Is stored in the field, whether or not to execute the first pre-reading effect and the effect mode of the pre-reading effect (make the cat character appear) based on the random value SR2 for determining the pre-reading effect. It is a table referred to for determination. In the first look-ahead effect execution determination table (at the time of a loss) 161B, whether the game state before the start of the big hit game state is a normal state, a probability change state or a short time state, for example, an effect control flag setting unit 191 In accordance with the value of the prefetch process flag provided in the value, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value SR2 for determining the prefetch effect is determined as to whether the first prefetch effect is executed or not. Is assigned to the determination result of the production mode.

  In this embodiment, when a pre-reading result having a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” is stored, It is determined as a production mode in which a cat character appears. When the special figure display result is “losing” and the prefetching result with super reach is stored, the production mode of the cat character is determined as the production mode of the prefetching production. Thus, when the pre-reading effect in which the dog character appears is executed, the player can recognize that there is reserved data whose special figure display result is “big hit”, and the pre-read in which the cat character appears. When the effect is executed, it can be recognized that there is pending data with high expectation that the special figure display result is “big hit”.

  The second look-ahead effect execution determination table (at the time of big hit) 161C has a pre-read result at which the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 round” or “16 round” at the start of the seventh round. When stored in the pre-reading result storage unit 195 (FIG. 17), whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect mode (whether the dog character appears, or the cat character It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to appear based on the random value SR2 for determining the pre-reading effect. In the second pre-reading effect execution determination table (at the time of big hit) 161C, whether the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state or the short-time state, for example, an effect control flag setting unit 191 In accordance with the value of the prefetch process flag provided in, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value SR2 for judging the prefetch effect is determined as to whether or not the second prefetch effect is to be executed. Is assigned to the determination result of the production mode.

  The second pre-reading effect execution determination table (at the time of losing) 161D is a pre-reading result storage unit 195 (see FIG. 17) at the start of the big hit gaming state where the special figure display result is “losing” and the pre-reading result with super reach. Are stored in the table, whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect and the effect mode of the pre-reading effect (make the cat character appear) based on the random number SR2 for determining the pre-reading effect. It is a table referred to for determination. In the second pre-reading effect execution determination table (at the time of losing) 161D, whether the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state or the short time state, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 In accordance with the value of the prefetch process flag provided in, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value SR2 for judging the prefetch effect is determined as to whether or not the second prefetch effect is to be executed. Is assigned to the determination result of the production mode.

  In the setting of the first prefetch effect execution determination tables 161A and 161B, when the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is the normal state, more determined values than when the probability variation state and the short time state are set, It is assigned to the determination result for executing the first prefetch effect. Further, in the setting of the second prefetch effect execution determination tables 161C and 161D, when the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is the normal state, more determined values than when the probability changing state or the short time state is set. Is assigned to the determination result of executing the second pre-reading effect.

  Here, in the case where the normal state is controlled before the start of the big hit gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start winning opening is lower than in the case where it is controlled to either the probability variation state or the short time state. The possibility that the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B becomes low. For this reason, in the case of being controlled to the normal state before the start of the big hit gaming state, the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 (FIG. 17) is compared to the case of being controlled to either the probability change state or the time-short state. The number of prefetched results stored, and therefore the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the special figure display result is “lost” and super There is a high possibility that the number of read-ahead results to reach will be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is a normal state, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is different from the case of either the probability variation state or the short-time state. The pre-reading effect is as much as possible because the number of pre-read results that are either “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” or the number of pre-read results that are super-reach when the special figure display result is “losing” is high. By increasing the rate at which execution is determined, even if the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is any of the normal state, the short-time state, and the probability variation state, the execution rate of the pre-reading effect is extremely It is possible to prevent the decrease. As a result, even when the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the big hit gaming state, the pre-reading effect can be effectively impressed to the player, similarly to the case where the probability changing state or the short-time state changes to the big hit gaming state. it can.

  Further, in the setting of the first prefetch effect execution determination tables 161A and 161B, when the value of the prefetch process flag is “1” or “2”, more decision values than when the value is “0”. Is assigned to the determination result of executing the first prefetching effect. Also, in the setting of the second prefetch effect execution determination tables 161C and 161D, when the prefetch process flag is “1” or “2”, a larger number of determination values than the case where the prefetch process flag is “0” It is assigned to the determination result for executing the pre-reading effect.

  Here, when the pre-reading effect is executed in the big hit game state, the player recognizes that the game is controlled to the big hit game state again, and thus stops the launch of the game ball. For this reason, the number of pre-read results stored in the pre-read result holding storage unit 195 (FIG. 17) when the game is controlled to the big hit game state again, and therefore the special figure display, is higher than that when the game is controlled to the big hit game state last time. There is a possibility that the number of pre-read results that result in “big hit” and the big hit type will be “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the number of pre-read results that are super-reach when the special figure display result is “lost” Becomes higher. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the value of the prefetch process flag is “1” or “2”, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is larger than when the value is “0”. The pre-reading effect is as much as possible because the number of pre-read results that are either “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” or the number of pre-read results that are super-reach when the special figure display result is “losing” is high. By increasing the rate at which execution is determined, even if the value of the prefetch process flag is between “0” and “2”, the execution rate of the prefetch effect is prevented from being extremely reduced. can do. As a result, even when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state again, it is possible to effectively impress the player with the pre-reading effect as in the case of the previous big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the second pre-reading effect is executed in the second pre-reading effect execution determination tables 161C and 161D regardless of whether the game state before the start of the big hit gaming state is the normal state, the time-saving state, or the probability change state. The determination value assigned to the determination result is larger than the determination value assigned to the determination result for executing the first prefetch effect in the first prefetch effect execution determination tables 161A and 161B. With such a setting, the second prefetch effect is executed at a higher rate than the first prefetch effect, and thus is stored in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 (FIG. 17) after the big hit gaming state is started. The second look-ahead effect executed based on the reserved data can be further impressed.

  FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of a prefetch effect execution timing determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as the prefetch effect execution determination determination table, a first prefetch effect execution timing determination table 162A shown in FIG. 16A and a second prefetch effect execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 162B is prepared in advance.

  When executing the first pre-reading effect, the first pre-reading effect execution timing determination table 162A determines the execution timing based on the random number SR3 for determining the pre-reading effect execution timing. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not. In the first pre-reading effect execution timing determination table 162A, depending on whether the promotion effect pattern is the promotion effect SP1 to the promotion SP3, or whether the jackpot type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR3 for determining the pre-reading effect execution timing is assigned to 1 to 7 rounds.

  In the setting of the first prefetch effect execution timing determination table 162A, when the promotion effect pattern is the promotion SP1 and the jackpot type is “7 rounds”, among the random value SR3 for determining the prefetch effect execution timing, “68” ˜ When the value in the range of “200” is assigned to 7 rounds, and the jackpot type is “16 rounds”, a random number SR3 for determining the pre-reading effect execution timing is assigned to 7 rounds. Not. Thus, when the promotion effect corresponding to the promotion effect pattern of promotion SP1 is executed by the setting, even if the first prefetch effect is not executed in 4 rounds, the jackpot type is “7 rounds”. For example, it can be executed in 7 rounds.

  Further, in the setting of the first prefetching effect execution timing determination table 162A, when the promotion effect pattern is the promotion SP2 and the jackpot type is “7 rounds”, the random number SR3 for determining the prefetching effect execution timing is “64”. ”To“ 200 ”are assigned to 7 rounds, and when the jackpot type is“ 16 rounds ”, the random number SR3 for determining the pre-reading effect execution timing is set for 7 rounds. Not assigned. In this way, when the promotion effect corresponding to the promotion effect pattern of promotion SP2 is executed by the setting, even if the first prefetch effect is not executed in any of the first to sixth rounds, the jackpot type is “ “7 rounds” can be executed in 7 rounds.

  In the setting of the first prefetch effect execution timing determination table 162A, when the jackpot type is “16 rounds” and the promotion effect pattern is either promotion SP1 or promotion SP2, the first prefetch effect is determined. While the execution timing is not determined to be 7 rounds, when the promotion effect pattern is promotion SP3, the execution timing of the first prefetch effect may be determined to be 7 rounds. Furthermore, when the promotion effect pattern is promotion SP1, only the 4th round or the 7th round is determined as the execution timing of the first prefetch effect, whereas the promotion effect pattern is either promotion SP2 or promotion SP3. In some cases, any one of rounds 1 to 7 may be determined as the execution timing of the first prefetch effect. Thus, in the setting of the first prefetch effect execution timing determination table 162A, the execution timing of the first prefetch effect varies depending on which of the promotion SP1 to promotion SP3 is selected as the promotion effect pattern.

  The second pre-reading effect execution timing determination table 162B, when executing the second pre-reading effect, the execution timing is any of 8 to 16 rounds based on the random number SR3 for determining the pre-reading effect execution timing. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not. In the second pre-reading effect execution timing determination table 162B, for example, the pre-reading effect execution timing determination is performed according to a stored value (a jackpot hold memory number count value) in a big hit hold memory number counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR3 is assigned to 8 to 16 rounds.

  Here, the jackpot reserved memory number counter is a special figure game in which the special figure display result executed until the prefetch effect is ended is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. This is for counting the remaining number of times in an identifiable manner. As an example, in the jackpot holding memory count counter, when the prefetching effect is started, the special figure display result stored in the prefetching result holding memory unit 195 is “hit” and the jackpot type is “7 rounds”. ”Or“ 16 rounds ”, the data indicating the number of pre-read results (the number of jackpot reserved storage) is set as the jackpot reserved memory count value. After that, every time the variable display result becomes “7 round jackpot” or “16 round jackpot”, the jackpot pending storage count value is updated by 1 or the like.

  With such a setting, whether the second pre-reading effect is executed in rounds 8 to 16 differs according to the number of jackpot reservations stored in the pre-read result storage unit 195 (FIG. 17). Since it can be determined by a ratio, the number of jackpot reservations stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 (FIG. 17) depending on whether the second prefetch effect is executed in 8 to 16 rounds. The player's expectation for can be different.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes a light emitting body such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs, operation buttons 30, and movable members included in the effect item. In order to control the production operation using the production device (production electrical component) including a plurality of types, pattern data constituting the production control pattern is stored in advance. Such an effect control pattern may include, for example, a symbol variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and the like.

  The symbol variation control pattern relates to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 in a period from when the decorative symbol variable display is started to when the final decorative symbol which is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to be comprised in advance by the pattern data etc. which show the content of control, and for every variation pattern of a decoration design. Further, different symbol variation control patterns may be prepared corresponding to a plurality of types of effect modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Each of the plurality of symbol variation control patterns includes a decorative symbol display position and a decorative symbol display position in a variable symbol display performed using a final symbol that is a final stop symbol, a temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped during variable display, and the like. It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as the size, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern, and the variation speed. Here, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, etc. are determined at the start of variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. If it is.

  The notice effect control pattern is composed of pattern data indicating the control content of the effect operation in the notice effect, and may be prepared in advance for each of the notice effect patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation in the notice effect. For example, each of the plurality of notice effect control patterns is prepared in advance to execute a plurality of notice patterns prepared in advance for executing a notice effect of “character notice” or a notice effect of “notice during operation”. Corresponding to any of the plurality of notice patterns, the display position and size of the effect image, the update display procedure, the setting of the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation action on the operation button 30, and the switching of the effect operation at the time of detecting the operation It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as setting.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 17, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 17 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, an effect control buffer setting unit 194, and a prefetch result holding memory. Part 195.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the display screen of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The prefetch result storage unit 195 stores the prefetch result notified by the prefetch result notification command. As an example, the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 associates with the hold number in the order of reception of the prefetch result notification command, sets the prefetch result notified by the prefetch result notification command as the hold data, and the number is a predetermined upper limit value. Store until it reaches (for example, “8”). In addition, a prefetch effect execution flag is stored in association with the hold data in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195. The pre-reading effect execution flag indicates whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed for the hold data and whether or not the pre-read effect is executed for the hold data has been determined. Show. The prefetch effect execution flag is set before the determination as to whether or not to execute the prefetch effect (first prefetch effect and second prefetch effect) corresponding to the hold data, or the first prefetch effect. Is determined not to be executed (before determination of execution of the second prefetch effect), a value of “0” is set, and when it is determined to execute the prefetch effect corresponding to the hold data, A value of “1” is set, and it is determined whether or not to execute a prefetch effect (first prefetch effect and second prefetch effect) corresponding to the hold data, and the first prefetch When it is determined not to execute the effect and the second prefetch effect, a value of “2” is set. Further, the hold data whose prefetch effect execution flag is “1” is associated with an effect mode of the prefetch effect (in this embodiment, an effect mode in which the characters “cat” or “dog” appear). Remembered. The effect mode of the pre-read effect is referred to when the release effect is executed, and the release effect corresponding to the effect mode is executed.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31, and the effect. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the control board 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop. When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 18 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR6 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B, setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 18 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the first hold storage corresponding to the number of hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. It is determined whether or not the number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 may identify the first reserved memory number by reading the value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (first reserved memory number count value).

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value ( Step S203). Then, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are shown. Numerical data is extracted (step S204). Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 18 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the process of step S206, numerical data indicating each random value extracted in step S204 is read (pre-read) prior to the special symbol normal process of step S110 (step S207). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the prefetch result notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the prefetch result notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S208). . The command set in this way is produced from the main board 11 following the first start winning opening designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 18 after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the control board 12.

  In the process of step S207, the variable display result and the jackpot type determined based on the numerical data indicating each random value extracted in step S204 are determined prior to the special symbol normal process in step S110. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the variable display result corresponding to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S204 is “big hit” or “lost”. At this time, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, whether the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” corresponding to the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type. Whether it is “2 rounds” is specified. When it is determined that the variable display result is “losing”, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined from “230” to “251” corresponding to the determination of the variation pattern type of super reach. By determining whether or not it is within the range, it is specified whether or not “super-reach lose”. In the process of step S208, settings for transmitting the pre-reading result notification command corresponding to the variable display result or the big hit type specified in step S207 are performed.

  As a result, when a game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening is detected, whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or whether the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. Whether or not it is “2 rounds” and whether or not the special figure display result is “losing” is accompanied by super reach, and a different prefetch result notification command is sent from the main board 11 according to the determination result. It can be transmitted to the effect control board 12. On the side of the effect control board 12, the special control display result is displayed before the effect control CPU 120 or the like starts variable display of the decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the first start winning opening. Whether or not it will be a “big hit”, whether the big hit type will be “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” or “2 rounds”, and if the special figure display result is “losing”, will it be accompanied by super reach? You can specify whether or not.

  After executing the process of step S208, the total number of reserved memories is reduced to 1 by adding 1 to the value of the total number of reserved memories counter (total number of reserved memories stored) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Add (step S209). Then, “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S210). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S211). . The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is performed by, for example, executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 18 after the special symbol process process is completed, and the first start winning prize designation command and the prefetch result notification. Following the command, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes) ) Or, after the processing of step S211, the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (step S212). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S212; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S212; Yes), it corresponds to the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S213). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the value of the second reserved memory number counter (second reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S213 (step S213; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S213; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number count value. (Step S214). Among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random for determining the variation pattern type The numerical value MR3 is extracted (step S215). Numerical value data indicating each random value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (step S216). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed. (Step S217). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the process of step S217, the numerical data indicating each random value extracted in step S215 is read (pre-read) prior to the special symbol normal process of step S110 (step S218). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second prefetch result notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, settings for transmitting the second prefetch result notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed. (Step S219). The second prefetch result notification command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command by, for example, executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 18 after the special symbol process process is completed. And transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In the process of step S218, the variable display result and jackpot type determined based on the numerical data indicating each random value extracted in step S215 are determined prior to the special symbol normal process in step S110. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the variable display result corresponding to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S215 is “big hit” or “lost”. At this time, if it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is specified as “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” regardless of the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type. . When it is determined that the variable display result is “losing”, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined from “230” to “251” corresponding to the determination of the variation pattern type of super reach. By determining whether or not it is within the range, it is specified whether or not “super-reach lose”. And in the process of step S219, the setting for transmitting the pre-reading result notification command corresponding to the variable display result specified in step S218 and the jackpot type is performed.

  As a result, when a game ball that has passed through the second start winning opening is detected, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”, and the big hit types are “7 rounds” and “16 rounds”. If the special figure display result is “lost”, it is determined whether or not super reach is involved, and a different prefetch result notification command is produced from the main board 11 according to the determination result. It can be transmitted to the control board 12. Then, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 or the like displays the special figure display result “ Specify whether it will be a big hit, whether the big hit type will be either “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, and if the special figure display result will be “losing”, whether it will be accompanied by super reach Can do. It should be noted that the processing in step S218 is different from the processing in step S207 in determining whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or whether the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. A display result determination table may be referred to. That is, different specific display result determination tables may be referred to depending on whether the variable symbol designation buffer value is “1” or “2”.

  After executing the process of step S219, the total reserved memory count is incremented by 1 (step S220), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory count count. Then, “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S221). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S222). . For example, when the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. Following the result notification command, the result is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. After the start winning determination process as described above is executed, one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 shown in FIG. 19 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined to be “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, One of the lost symbols) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and the result of determination of the variation pattern type. Corresponding to the above, a process for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol in the special symbol game or the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. To do. Further, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “7 rounds”, “16 rounds”, or “2 rounds”. . As an example, in the case of being controlled to the 7 round big hit state corresponding to the big hit type being “7 rounds”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, Set the number of times of opening of the big winning opening as the number of round executions to “7 times”. In addition, in the case of being controlled to the 16 round big hit state corresponding to the big hit type being “16 rounds”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds” and the round Is set to “16 times”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to the two round big hit state corresponding to “2 rounds”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. In addition to setting, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, which is the number of executions of the round, is set to “2 times”.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses and processing that performs various settings for controlling to a probable state corresponding to the jackpot type are included.

  21 and 22 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, first, the CPU 103 first and second reserved memory numbers based on the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. It is determined whether or not the total reserved storage number that is the total value of the numbers is “0” (step S231 shown in FIG. 21). At this time, if the total reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), the start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S232). At this time, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory number count value, the total reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C receives the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (step S233). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S232 is “first” or “second” (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “first” (step S234; first), the first special figure hold storage unit 151A stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (step S235). At this time, for example, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the first reserved memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S236). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the value of the special fluctuation designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (the fluctuation special figure) The designated buffer value) is set to “1” (step S237).

  If it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “second” (step S234; second), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (step S239). At this time, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, the second reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S240). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S241).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S237 and S241, a special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 130 is selected and set (step S242). For example, in the process of step S242, the storage address of the special figure display result determination table 130 in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like.

  The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S235 is “big hit” or “lost”. The special figure display result is determined to be either “big hit” or “losing” according to which of the determined values assigned to each special figure display result of “” (step S243). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S243 is “big hit” (step S244 in FIG. 22A).

  If it is determined in step S244 that the game is a “hit” (step S244; Yes), the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S245). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S246). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, “7 rounds”, “16 rounds”, “2 rounds” are based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination read in step S235. Is determined as one of a plurality of jackpot types prepared in advance (step S247). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S241, the decision value is not assigned to the big hit type of “2 rounds” in the big hit type decision table 131. The jackpot type is not determined to be “2 rounds”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by updating the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 ( Step S248). For example, if the big hit type is “7 rounds”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “16 rounds” may be “1”, and “2 rounds” may be “2”.

  After the process of step S248 is executed, a maximum value of the number of times of winning a prize opening is set (step S253). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 22B, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, if the big hit type buffer value set in step S248 is “0”, the big winning opening The maximum number of times of opening is set to “7” corresponding to the opening game of 7 times. In addition, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, if the big hit type buffer value set in step S248 is “1”, the maximum value for the number of big winning opening is 16 times open game. Set to “16”. On the other hand, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, if the big hit type buffer value set in step S248 is “2”, the maximum value for the number of times that the big winning opening is opened is set to two times. Set to “2” corresponding to.

  When it is determined in step S244 that it is not “big hit” (step S244; No), after executing the process of step S253, the result of the prior decision as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, A confirmed special symbol is set in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot type in the gaming state (step S254). As an example, if it is determined in step S244 that the special figure display result is not “big hit”, the result is a lost symbol corresponding to a pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S244 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” corresponding to the big hit type determination result in step S248 are displayed. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “7 rounds”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” as the jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is “16 rounds”, the special symbol indicating the number of the jackpot symbol “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is “2 rounds”, the special symbol indicating the number of the jackpot symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S254, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S255), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved storage is “0” in step S231 in FIG. 21 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S256), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In the demonstration display setting in step S256, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In contrast, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not yet transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed by setting the storage address of the customer waiting demonstration designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, for example. The customer waiting demonstration designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 18 after the special symbol process is completed. Is done.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining any of the plurality of fluctuation pattern types (step S261). S262).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being executed is set (step S266). ).

  When the time reduction flag is OFF in step S266 (step S266; No), it is determined whether or not the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more (step S267). If the total reserved storage number is less than “3” (step S267; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected and set (step S268). On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is on in step S266 (step S266; Yes), or when the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more in step S267 (step S267; Yes), the fluctuation occurs. A loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of pattern types (step S269). Even when the time reduction flag is on in step S266, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and a different determination table is set according to the determination result. You may choose. For example, if the hourly flag is on and the total reserved memory number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S268 to select and set the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132B, while the total reserved memory number If “1” is greater than or equal to “1”, the process proceeds to step S269, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132C may be selected and set.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S268, and S269, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the special-purpose variation random value buffer or the like, step S262, By referring to the use table set in either S268 or S269, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S270). Numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type may be extracted from the random number circuit 503, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S270 is executed. The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold together with the random numbers MR1 to MR2, which are extracted when a game ball that has entered the start prize opening or the second start prize opening (start winning prize) is detected. You may memorize | store as pending data in the memory | storage part 151B.

  In the process of step S270, whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied. Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied, Using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by the random counter or the like, the variation pattern type can be determined as any one of a plurality of types by the common processing module.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S270, either the loss variation pattern determination table 133A or the big hit variation pattern determination table 133B is selected depending on whether the special figure display result is “lost” or “big hit”. Is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S271). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S271 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S272). The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S272 is executed, or may be the first start prize. The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation memory together with random numbers MR1 and MR2 are extracted when a game ball that has entered the mouth or the second start winning opening (start winning prize) is detected. You may memorize | store as pending data in the part 151B.

  In the process of step S272, whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition, Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second starting condition, a common random Using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 that is used for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S272, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S270, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S272, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S273). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S274). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S274, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol change are performed (step S275). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. When the setting in step S275 is performed, every time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. A gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. The game state designation command and the pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S276), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer. Thereby, when the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 18 is executed after the special symbol stop process is finished, the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is executed. Is sent. After the setting in step S293, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in the process of step S295, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time reduction flag to turn off, the probability change count counter for counting the number of remaining special game games in the probability change state, and the special illustration in the time reduction state. What is necessary is just to perform the process etc. which clear the time-count counter for counting the number of remaining games. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S302). After executing the process of step S302, after determining whether or not to end the probability variation state and whether or not to end the short time state (step S303), the special symbol stop process is ended. For example, in the process of step S303, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control in the time reduction state may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. The probability variation state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability variation flag is on is updated by subtracting, for example, 1 from the probability variation count value stored in the probability variation counter. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated count value of probability variation matches a predetermined probability variation control end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the probability variation control end determination value, the probability control in the probability variation state may be terminated by clearing the probability variation flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the probability variation control end determination value, the state of the probability variation flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be terminated.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 25, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening process of the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 19, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end time waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), a setting for starting control of the probability variation state is performed (step S313). At this time, for example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state. Then, a predetermined count initial value (for example, “8”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation state is set in the probability variation number counter, and the special value that can be executed in the short time state. A count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the game is set in the time reduction counter.

  After the setting in step S313, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S314), and then the big hit end processing is terminated.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S16 of FIG. 18 as normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first executes a gate passage determination process (step S130). For example, in the gate passage determination process in step S130, it is determined whether or not the gate switch 21 is on based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and if it is off, the gate passage determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the gate switch 21 is on, a general-purpose reserved storage count value indicating the number of general-purpose reserved memory, which is the number of stored reserved data in a predetermined general-purpose reserved storage unit, is set as a general-purpose reserved upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”). At this time, if the usual figure holding upper limit value has been reached, the passage of the current game ball at the passing gate is invalidated and the gate passing determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the usual figure hold upper limit value is not reached, for example, random numbers for updating the usual figure display result are selected from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5 is extracted. The numerical data indicating the random value MR5 extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the beginning of the empty entry in a predetermined general-purpose reserved storage unit, whereby the random value MR5 is stored. In this case, after updating so as to add 1 to the usual reserved storage number count value, the gate passage determination process is terminated.

  After executing the gate passage determination process in step S130, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S140 to S143 shown in FIG. 26 according to the value of the normal process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined general symbol hold storage unit. At this time, for example, when there is holding data stored in a predetermined general-purpose holding storage unit, the general-purpose display result, which is a variable display result of the normal symbol in the general-purpose game, is set to “per-standard” or “ After the usual drawing display result decision process for deciding whether or not to make “figure losing” is executed, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  In the general map display result determination process, a predetermined general map display result determination table is created based on numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the general map display result included in the reserved data read from the predetermined general map storage unit. Refer to and determine the general map display result. Here, in the common map display result determination table, when the time reduction flag is on, the ratio of the decision to make the general map display result “per map” is higher than when the time reduction flag is off. The decision value is assigned to the normal map display result. Thereby, in the special game state such as the probability change state and the short time state, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal game” than in the normal state, thereby forming the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state increases, and the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening.

  In the general map display result determination process, the general map change time corresponding to the general map display result is also determined. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the normal time fluctuation time is set to be shorter than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, in the special game state such as the probability variation state and the short time state, the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the regular game is shortened, and the variable display result of “per regular diagram” is derived and displayed. The interval is also shortened, and the frequency at which the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the expanded open state increases, and the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. Further, in the general map display result determination process, when the general map display result is “per normal map”, the tilt control time that is the time for the second start winning opening to be in the expanded open state or the number of times to be in the expanded open state A certain number of tilt control times may be set. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the tilt control time and the number of times of tilt control are set to be larger than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the time and number of times that the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state increases, so that the game ball easily passes (enters) the second start winning opening. . Note that the setting for setting the second start winning opening in the expanded open state may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S142 or the normal electric accessory actuating process in step S143.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to vary the normal symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the normal symbol is measured. Further, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached a predetermined normal time fluctuation time.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 stops the change of the normal symbol based on the elapse of the normal symbol change time, and the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). ) To make settings. The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S143 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece included in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is vertically aligned with the fact that the variable display result (the general map display result) in the normal game is “per normal map”. The setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the enlarged open state by moving from the position to the tilt position is performed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 27 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, the effect random number update process is executed (step S402), and among the effect random numbers used for effect control, numerical data indicating a random number value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is displayed as software. Update with Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, the effect control process process is executed (step S406), and the process returns to step S402. In the effect control process in step S406, for example, an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and an effect object Regarding the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the driving operation of the movable member provided, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  In the command analysis process in step S405, for example, a start winning command process as shown in FIG. 28 may be executed. In the start winning command process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a prefetch result notification command has been received (step S501). The received effect control command is stored in the effect control command reception buffer, and the effect control CPU 120 reads the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer and confirms the contents, thereby receiving the received effect control command. A control command can be specified. At this time, if the prefetch result notification command has not been received (step S501; No), the start winning process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the prefetch result notification command has been received (step S501; Yes), the prefetch result is specified by reading the EXT data in the prefetch result notification command, for example (step S502). Then, the effect control CPU 120 stores the specified prefetch result at the head of the empty entry in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 shown in FIG. 17 (step S503). Subsequently, variable display prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S504) is executed to determine whether or not to execute variable display prefetching notice.

  FIG. 29A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display prefetch notice setting process executed in step S504. In the variable display prefetching advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 29A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the prefetching result specified in step S502 is “big hit” (step S831). If the pre-reading result is not “big hit” (step S831; No), the setting for displaying the reserved memory in the normal manner (circular) in the start winning memory display area 5H without executing the pre-reading notice during variable display is performed. (Step S837), and the variable display prefetching advance notice setting process is terminated.

  If the prefetch result is “big hit” (step S831; Yes), the prefetch effect execution flag in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 is “1” corresponding to the execution of the prefetch effect. It is determined whether or not there is (step S832). If there is pending data whose pre-reading effect execution flag is “1” (step S832; Yes), the pre-reading notice during variable display is not executed to avoid duplication of the pre-reading notice during variable display and the pre-reading effect. The start winning memory display area 5H is set to perform the hold memory display in the normal mode (circular) (step S837), and the variable display prefetching advance notice setting process is terminated. In addition, in order to avoid duplication of the pre-reading notice during variable display and the pre-reading effect, a predetermined number of times after the big hit gaming state (for example, for the hold data for which the pre-reading effect is to be executed, Until the variable display of the upper limit (8 times) of the data storage number is executed, the pre-reading notice during variable display may not be executed. In step S832, the pre-reading effect execution flag is “2” corresponding to the determination that the pre-reading effect is not executed as a result of the determination as to whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed. It may be further determined whether the pre-reading notice during variable display is not executed even when there is pending data whose pre-reading effect execution flag is “2”. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the execution determination of the pre-reading effect and the variable display pre-reading notice, and the processing load due to the determination on the same pending data can be reduced.

  If there is pending data whose prefetch effect execution flag is “1” (step S832; Yes), the variable display prefetch notice determination table 201 shown in FIG. 29B is set (step S833). The variable display pre-reading notice determination table 201 shown in FIG. 29B is based on the variable display pre-reading notice determination random number SR4, and whether or not to execute the variable display pre-reading notice. It is a table for determining a production mode. The variable display prefetch notice determination table 201 is a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR4 depending on whether the jackpot type is “2 rounds”, “7 rounds”, or “16 rounds”. There is no pre-reading notice during variable display, an effect mode for executing a pre-reading notice during variable display with a star display as a hold memory display, an effect mode for executing a pre-reading notice during variable display with a sun memory as a hold memory display Assigned to either.

  Based on the numerical data indicating the random display value SR4 for variable display prefetching advance notice, the variable display prefetching notice table 201 set in the process of step S833 is referred to, so that the variable display prefetching notice is obtained. The presence / absence of execution and the production mode for execution are determined (step S834). Here, when it is determined not to execute the pre-reading notice during variable display (step S835; No), the process proceeds to step S837, and the reserved storage display is performed in the start-winning storage display area 5H in a normal manner (circular). Is set (step S837), and the variable display prefetching advance notice setting process is terminated.

  In addition, when it is determined that the pre-reading notice during variable display is to be executed (step S835; Yes), in order to perform the hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H in a mode (star shape, sun) according to the determination result. Is set (step S836), and the variable display prefetching advance notice setting process is terminated. In the variable display prefetching notice in this embodiment, the jackpot type can be suggested by the display mode of the hold storage display, but even when the prefetching result is “losing”, a predetermined ratio (for example, The variable display pre-reading notice may be executed at a lower rate than in the case of “big hit”, and it may be possible to indicate whether or not the big display is based on the variable display pre-reading notice. In this case, for example, the process of step S831 is skipped, and whether or not the variable display pre-reading notice is executed even when the variable display result is “losing” in step S833, and the effect mode when it is executed What is necessary is just to perform the process which determines.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 performs one of the following processes of steps S160 to S165, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Select and execute.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, the image display device 5 depends on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” in response to the determination to start variable display.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative symbols, the final decorative symbol, temporary stop symbol, warning pattern, etc., depending on the variation pattern and variable display result, etc. The process to determine is included. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, various effect control patterns such as a symbol variation control pattern and a notice effect control pattern are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, various types of symbol variation control patterns, warning effect control patterns, and the like corresponding to the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. Processing for reading out the control data and performing various effects control during variable display of the decorative design is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The decorative symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, when the special figure display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”, the value of the effect process flag is set to “4”. Updated. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the big hit control effect processing, for example, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Display the sound, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect is output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the lamp 9 and the decoration LED is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, a hit effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or voice Sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Processing for controlling various effect operations corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing, is included. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a final stop symbol determination process (step S551). FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the final stop symbol determination process executed in step S551. In the final stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result becomes “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S751). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S751; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to a case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S752).

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; Yes), after determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S753), The final stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S753, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Further, by referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right confirmed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative symbols. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols.

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; No), a final decorative symbol combination that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S754), and the final The stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S754, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left / right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S751 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S751; No), after determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination (step S759). Then, the final stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S759, first, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the big hit fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Stop by aligning with the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 by referring to the stored predetermined jackpot fixed symbol determination table. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined. When the jackpot type is “2 rounds”, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the jackpot combination corresponding to “2 rounds” is determined. In the case of the variation pattern for executing the relief effect, after determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination, if the temporary stop symbol is determined corresponding to the jackpot combination. Good (for example, a combination that is different from the jackpot combination and only the “medium” decorative pattern is determined).

  After the final stop symbol determination process as described above is executed in step S551 in FIG. 31, a variable display effect setting process is executed (step S552). FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display effect setting process executed in step S552. In the effect setting processing during variable display shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 first executes “slip” according to the variation pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not it is “with slip” that executes the variable display effect of “” (step S771).

  If it is determined in step S771 that there is “slip” (step S771; Yes), a decorative symbol that is a pre-slip temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped in the “slip” variable display effect is determined (step S772). As an example, in the process of step S772, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a pre-slip temporary stop symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The decorative symbol that becomes the temporary stop symbol before slip may be determined by referring to a predetermined pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination table.

  When it is determined in step S771 that there is no “slip” (step S771; No), after executing the process of step S772, for example, the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is read. In accordance with the variation pattern specified in the above, it is determined whether or not the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is executed (step S773). At this time, if it is determined that there is “pseudo-continuous” (step S773; Yes), the decoration that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” and constitutes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8. A symbol is determined (step S774). As an example, in the process of step S774, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a pseudo-continuous chance updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance determination table, etc., every time a pseudo-continuous change (re-variation) is executed, a temporary stop display is performed and a decorative pattern constituting any of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 is determined. do it.

  When it is determined in step S773 that it is not “there is pseudo-continuity” (step S773; No), the variable display effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  After executing the variable display effect setting process as described above in step S552 of FIG. 31, the notice effect setting process is executed (step S553). For example, in the notice effect setting process, it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed, and when it is executed, which one of a plurality of kinds of notice effects is to be executed, such as “character notice” or “operation notice”. Is done. In addition, processing for determining a notice pattern as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is performed in accordance with the kind of notice effect (notice effect type).

  Subsequent to the notice effect setting process in step S553, a discharge effect setting process is executed (step S552). FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing an example of the release effect setting process executed in step S554. In the release effect setting process shown in FIG. 34A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the prefetch effect execution flag of the hold data of the hold number “1” in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 is “1”. It is determined whether or not (step S811). If the pre-reading effect execution flag is “1”, it indicates that the pre-reading effect corresponding to the hold data is executed during the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, when a pre-reading effect that stocks “big hit” is executed, when a variable display corresponding to the reserved data is executed, release that releases the stocked “big hit” Production is performed. In this embodiment, a plurality of timings for starting execution of the release effect are prepared.

  If the prefetch effect execution flag of the hold data with the hold number “1” is not “1” (step S811; No), the release effect setting process is terminated. If the prefetch effect execution flag of the hold data with the hold number “1” is “1” (step S811; Yes), for example, by specifying the EXT data in the variation pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11 It is determined whether or not the changed variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to executing the relief effect (step S812).

  If the variation pattern corresponds to the execution of the relief effect (step S812; Yes), the release effect is executed in place of the relief effect in the period of executing the relief effect. The execution timing is determined (step S815).

  If the variation pattern does not correspond to the execution of the relief effect (step S812; No), the release effect execution timing determination table 203 shown in FIG. 34B is set (step S833). The release effect execution timing determination table 203 shown in FIG. 34 (B) is a table for determining the release effect execution timing based on the random number SR5 for determining the release effect execution timing. In the release effect execution timing determination table 203, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR5 is assigned to “before reach”, “during reach”, or “after temporary stop”. When “before reach” is determined, the release effect is executed before the variable display mode reaches the reach state. When it is determined that “in reach”, the release effect is executed when the variable display mode is in the reach state. In the case of “after provisional stop”, the release effect is executed after the temporary stop of the decorative pattern by the combination of the loss.

  Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number SR5 for determining the release effect execution timing, the release effect execution timing is determined by referring to the release effect execution timing determination table 203 set in step S813 (step S814). ).

  Subsequent to the release effect setting process in step S554, a jackpot confirmation notification effect setting process is executed (step S555). FIG. 35 (A) is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot confirmation notification effect setting process executed in step S555. In the jackpot confirmation notification effect setting process shown in FIG. 35 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first displays the special figure display result by, for example, reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not “big hit” is reached (step S821). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S821; No), the big hit fixed notification effect setting processing is ended.

  If it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S821; Yes), the prefetch effect execution flag of the hold data of the hold number “1” in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 is “1”. It is determined whether or not (step S822). If the pre-reading effect execution flag is “1” (step S822; Yes), since the release effect is executed in the current variable display, the big hit confirmation notification effect setting process is performed so as not to execute the big hit confirmation notification effect. Exit. In this embodiment, in the variable display for executing the release effect, the big hit confirmation notification effect is not executed. However, the variable effect in which the release effect is executed by providing a plurality of execution timings of the big hit confirmation notification effect is provided. In the display, the big hit confirmation notification effect may be executed at a timing later than the release effect. Further, in the variable display in which the release effect is executed, when it is determined that the jackpot confirmation notification effect is to be executed, control may be performed so that the release effect is executed instead of the jackpot determination notification effect. Good.

  If the pre-reading effect execution flag is not “1” (step S822; No), the jackpot finalizing effect determination table 204 shown in FIG. 35B is set (step S823). The jackpot decision effect determination table 204 shown in FIG. 35 (B) is a table for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot decision notification effect based on the random value SR6 for determining the big hit decision notification effect. In the jackpot decision effect determination table 204, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR6 corresponding to the jackpot type is assigned to execute the jackpot determination notification effect or not to execute the jackpot determination notification effect. ing.

  Then, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed by referring to the numerical data indicating the random value SR6 for determining the jackpot finalizing notification effect and the jackpot finalizing effect determination table 204 set in the process of step S823 based on the jackpot type. Is determined (step S824). In this embodiment, even when the jackpot type is “2 rounds”, the jackpot confirmation notification effect is executed. However, when the game value of the jackpot gaming state is “2 rounds”, the jackpot determination notification is performed. The production may not be executed. Also, the jackpot confirmation notification effect may be executed only when the jackpot type is a target of execution of the pre-reading effect or the release effect. In this way, by unifying the jackpot type to be notified, the notification target of each effect can be easily understood.

  Subsequent to the big hit determination notification effect setting process in step S555, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S556). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as a usage pattern. At this time, if the variation pattern executes a relief effect, a symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the execution of the relief effect is selected and set as a usage pattern. In addition, when the release effect is executed, the symbol variation control pattern is set in accordance with which of the effect modes of the pre-reading effect is determined and the determination result (release effect execution timing) in the release effect setting process in step S554. Select and set as usage pattern. For example, in the variation pattern in which the relief effect is executed, when the release effect is executed, the relief effect is not executed, and the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the release effect being executed during the period in which the relief effect is executed is Selected. When the big hit confirmation notification effect is executed, a symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the execution of the big hit confirmation notification effect is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, in response to the notice pattern determined in the notice effect setting process in step S553, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern.

  Subsequent to the process of step S556, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S557). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S558). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S556 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen 5. Thereafter, the hold data of the hold number “1” in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 is erased, and the hold data after the hold number “2” is shifted one entry higher (step S559), and the value of the effect process flag is set. Is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S560), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction, for example) (step S561) and then displays the updated effect control process timer value. Compared with the production control process timer determination value indicated by the control pattern, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S562). And if it does not correspond to any timer judgment value (step S562; No), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  When the timer determination value is matched in step S562 (step S562; Yes), various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. , One of the end codes) is read (step S563). Here, if the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in step S562 match the effect control process timer value, the plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other and stored. What is necessary is just to read control data by the process of step S563. Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S563 is an end code (step S564). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S564; No), after performing an effect control command process for performing a command or setting according to the control data read in step S563 (step S564) S565), the decorative pattern changing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S564 that the code is an end code (step S564; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S566). Then, the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “3” that is a value corresponding to the processing at the end of decorative symbol variation (step S567), and then the decorative symbol variation processing is terminated. When a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, when it is determined in step S564 that it is an end code, “left”, “middle”, “right” ”In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, for example, the temporary stop display is performed so as to display the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol stop command is received in the decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 shown in FIG. In response to this, the decorative design may be stopped completely.

  37 and 38 are flowcharts showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in step S163 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation end process, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the final decorative symbol, which is the final stop symbol, in a completely stopped display and displays it (step S571 in FIG. 37). When a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed until the decorative symbol stop command is received. What is necessary is just to carry out temporary stop display so that the fluctuation variation display of a decoration symbol may be performed, for example in 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S571, for example, by determining whether or not a hit start designation command has been received, or by reading the EXT data of the hit start designation command when received, the special figure display result is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not (step S572). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S572; No), the value of the effect process flag is initialized to “0” (step S573), and then the decorative symbol variation end process is performed. Exit.

  When it is determined in step S572 that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S572; Yes), whether or not the big hit type is “2 rounds” by reading the EXT data of the hit start designation command or the like. Is determined (step S574). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit type is not “2 rounds” (step S574; No), for example, the value of the prefetch process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 corresponds to the execution of the prefetch effect. It is determined whether or not the value is “1” (step S575).

  When it is determined in step S575 that the value of the prefetch process flag is “1” (step S575; Yes), the prefetch effect execution flag is executed in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 and the prefetch effect is executed. It is determined whether or not there is pending data that is “1” corresponding to this (step S576). If there is no hold data that is “1” corresponding to execution of the prefetch effect (step S576; No), the value of the prefetch process flag is updated to “2” that corresponds to the end of the prefetch effect. (Step S580).

  When it is determined in step S575 that the value of the prefetch process flag is not “1” (step S575; No), the prefetch effect execution flag corresponds to executing the prefetch effect in step S576. When it is determined that there is no pending data that is “1” (step S576; No), or after executing any processing of S580, the type of jackpot is determined by reading the EXT data of the hit start designation command. Is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” (step S581). Subsequently, the promotion effect pattern determination table 160 shown in FIG. 13 is selected and set as a use table for determining the promotion effect pattern (step S582). Then, the promotion effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the promotion effect pattern determination table 160 set in step S582 based on the numerical data indicating the promotion effect pattern determination random value SR1. (Step S583).

  After executing the process of step S583, it is determined whether or not the hold data is stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 shown in FIG. 17 (step S584 in FIG. 38). At this time, if the hold data is stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 (step S584; Yes), the prefetch result is read as the hold data stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 (step S585). ).

  Then, in the prefetched result read in step S585, the prefetched result in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the special figure display result is “ It is determined whether or not a pre-read result that is a super reach is included in “Lose” (step S586). At this time, the prefetch result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the special figure display result is “lost” and the prefetch result is super reach. Is included (step S586; Yes), the pre-reading effect execution flag corresponding to the pre-reading result is “0” corresponding to that before the determination as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is completed. ] Is determined (step S631). If the pre-reading effect execution flag is “0” (step S631; Yes), the first pre-reading shown in FIG. 14A is used as a use table for determining the presence or absence of the first pre-reading effect for the hold data. An effect execution determination table (at the time of big hit) 161A or a first prefetch effect execution determination table (at the time of loss) 161B shown in FIG. 14B is selected and set (step S587). In step S587, if the prefetching result is a prefetching result in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the first prefetching effect execution determination table (big hit) 161A is selected, and if the variable display result is “lost” and the pre-reading result is super reach, the first pre-reading effect execution determination table (at the time of loss) 161B is selected. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2 for the prefetching effect execution determination, the first prefetching effect execution determination tables 161A and 161B set in the process of step S587 are referred to, so that the first prefetching effect is determined. The presence / absence is determined and the production mode is determined (step S588). Here, the determined effect mode is stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 in association with the hold data.

  If it is determined in step S588 that “the first pre-reading effect is present” (when it is determined to execute the first pre-reading effect) (step S589; Yes), the pre-reading effect is executed for the hold data. The flag is set to “1” corresponding to executing the pre-reading effect (step S633).

  After the processing of step S633, the first prefetch effect execution timing determination table 162A shown in FIG. 16A is selected and set as a use table for determining the execution timing of the first prefetch effect (step S63). S592). Then, referring to the first prefetch effect execution timing determination table 162A set in step S592, based on the numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the prefetch effect execution timing, the execution timing of the first prefetch effect is determined. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S593).

  Corresponding to the execution timing of the first pre-reading effect determined in this way, for example, the pre-reading effect execution timing designation buffer value that is a stored value of the pre-reading effect execution timing designation buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is updated. The determined execution timing of the first prefetch effect is stored (step S594). As an example, if the execution timing of the first prefetch effect is “4 rounds”, the first prefetch effect execution timing designation buffer value is “4”, and if it is “7 rounds”, the first prefetch effect execution timing is designated. The buffer value may be “7”.

  If it is determined No in step S589 or after the process in step S594, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. It is determined whether there is pending data or pending data that is super-reach when the special figure display result is “lost” (step S635). In addition, there is reserved data with a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or reserved data with a special figure display result of “losing” and being super reach. If it is (step S635; Yes), the process returns to step S631 to determine whether or not to execute the first prefetch effect for the hold data and the execution timing of the first prefetch effect.

  If it is determined in step S574 of FIG. 37 that the jackpot type is “2 rounds” (step S574; Yes), it is determined in step S584 that the prefetched result hold storage unit 195 does not store hold data. If it is determined (step S584; No), in step S586, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. When it is determined that the hold data that becomes super reach is not included in “Lose” (step S586; No), when it is determined in step S631 that the prefetch effect execution flag is “1” or “2” (Step S631; Yes), in Step S635, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, “16 rounds”. If it is determined that the pre-read result indicating that it is out of place, the special figure display result is “losing”, and no other pre-read result that is super reach is included (step S635; No), an effect that is a big hit effect Settings for starting the operation are performed (step S595 in FIG. 37). As an example, in the process of step S595, when the jackpot type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the effect control pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect including the promotion effect corresponding to the promotion effect pattern determined in step S583. Is read from various effect control pattern tables, and the effect control process timer is set. Then, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, supplying a display control command to the display control unit 123, transmitting a sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, By transmitting a signal to the lamp control board 14 or the like, an effect operation that is a big hit effect including a promotion effect corresponding to the promotion effect pattern determined in step S583 is executed.

  Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during jackpot control (step S596), and then the decorative symbol variation end process is ended.

  39 and 40 are flowcharts showing an example of the big hit control effect processing executed in step S164 of FIG. In the effect processing during the big hit control, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S601 in FIG. 39). At this time, if no hit end designation command is received (step S601; No), the prefetch effect execution timing designation buffer value is read (step S602), and it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect execution timing has come ( Step S603). As an example, in the process of step S603, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds has been updated by specifying the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state from the big winning prize opening opening designation command etc. for the big hit transmitted from the main board 11. If it has been updated, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds after the update matches the prefetch effect execution timing designation buffer value. Then, if the updated number of rounds matches the prefetch effect execution timing designation buffer value, it may be determined that the prefetch effect execution timing has come.

  If it is determined in step S603 that it is not the pre-reading effect execution timing (step S603; No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the seventh round (step S604). As an example, in the process of step S604, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big winning opening opening designation command for big hits transmitted from the main board 11, and the number of rounds is changed from “6” to “7”. What is necessary is just to determine whether it updated.

  If it is determined in step S604 that it is the start timing of the seventh round (step S604; Yes), it is determined whether or not the hold data is stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 shown in FIG. Step S605 in FIG. 40). At this time, if the hold data is stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 (step S605; Yes), the prefetch result is read as the hold data stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 (step S606). ).

  Then, in the prefetched result read in step S606, the prefetched result in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the special figure display result is “ It is determined whether or not a prefetched result that is a super reach is included in “Lose” (step S607). At this time, the prefetch result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the special figure display result is “lost” and the prefetch result is super reach. Is included (step S607; Yes), the pre-reading effect execution flag corresponding to the pre-reading result is “0” corresponding to that before the determination as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is completed. Is determined (step S641). If the prefetch effect execution flag is “0” (step S641; Yes), the second prefetch effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 14C is used as a use table for determining the presence or absence of the second prefetch effect. 161C (at the time of big hit) or the second prefetch effect execution determination table (at the time of loss) 161D shown in FIG. 14D is selected and set (step S608). In step S608, if the prefetching result is a prefetching result in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the second prefetching effect execution determination table (big hit) Time) 161C is selected, and if the variable display result is “lost” and the pre-reading result is super reach, the second pre-reading effect execution determination table (at the time of loss) 161D is selected. The presence or absence of the second prefetch effect is determined by referring to the second prefetch effect execution determination tables 161C and 161D set in step S608 based on the numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for the prefetch effect execution determination. At the same time, the effect mode is determined (step S609). Here, the determined effect mode is stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 in association with the hold data.

  If it is determined in step S609 that “the second pre-reading effect is present” (when it is determined to execute the second pre-reading effect) (step S610; Yes), the pre-reading effect of the hold data is executed. The flag is set to “1” corresponding to execution of the pre-reading effect (step S642). If it is determined that “the second pre-reading effect is not present” (step S610; Yes), “2” corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect is set (step S643).

  After executing the processing of step S642, the second prefetch effect execution timing determination table 162B shown in FIG. 16B is selected and set as a use table for determining the execution timing of the second prefetch effect. (Step S613). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR3 for determining the pre-reading effect execution timing, the second pre-reading effect execution timing determination table 162B set in the process of step S613 is referred to, so that the second pre-reading effect is determined. The execution timing is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S614). Corresponding to the execution timing of the second pre-reading effect thus determined, the execution timing of the determined second pre-reading effect is stored by updating the pre-reading effect execution timing designation buffer value (step S615). .

  After executing the process of step S643 or after executing the process of step S615, the reserved data whose special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. Alternatively, it is determined whether there is pending data that is super-reach when the special figure display result is “lost” (step S644). In addition, there is reserved data with a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or reserved data with a special figure display result of “losing” and being super reach. If it is (step S644; Yes), the process returns to step S641 to determine whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect for the hold data and the execution timing of the second pre-reading effect.

  If it is determined in step S603 that the pre-reading effect execution timing is reached (step S603; Yes), the pre-reading effect execution timing designation buffer is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”. At the same time (step S616 in FIG. 39), a setting is made to execute an effect operation that is a pre-read effect (step S617). As an example, in the process of step S617, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the pre-read effect is read from various effect control pattern tables, and an effect control process timer is set. Then, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, supplying a display control command to the display control unit 123, transmitting a sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, For example, by transmitting a signal to the lamp control board 14, an effect operation serving as a pre-read effect is executed.

  Thereafter, the value of the prefetch process flag is updated to “1”, which is a value corresponding to execution of the prefetch effect (step S618), and then the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S604 that it is not the start timing of the seventh round (step S604; No), it is determined in step S605 of FIG. 40 that the prefetched result hold storage unit 195 does not store hold data. In this case (step S605; No), in step S607, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, and the special figure display result is “lost”. When it is determined that the hold data that becomes super reach is not included (step S607; No), when it is determined in step S641 that the prefetch effect execution flag is “1” or “2” (step S641; Yes), in step S644, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, “16 rounds” If it is determined that the pre-read result indicating that it is out of place, the special figure display result is “losing” and the pre-read result that is super-reach is not included (step S644; No), the round in the big hit gaming state Settings are made to execute an effect operation that is a big hit effect according to the number of rounds that is the number of executions (step S619 in FIG. 39). As an example, in the process of step S619, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is specified from the jackpot opening special command opening designation command for jackpot transmitted from the main board 11. When the number of rounds is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of rounds is read from various effect control pattern tables, and the effect control process timer is set. Then, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, supplying a display control command to the display control unit 123, transmitting a sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, By transmitting a signal to the lamp control board 14, an effect operation that is an effect during a big hit is executed. After executing the process of step S619, the big hit control effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S601 that a hit end designation command has been received (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch process flag is “2” (step S620). At this time, if the value of the prefetch process flag is “2” (step S620; Yes), the prefetch process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0” (step S621).

  When it is determined in step S620 that the value of the prefetch process flag is not “2” (step S620; No), after executing the process of step S621, the big hit is performed corresponding to the big hit gaming state. After setting for ending the effect (step S622), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” corresponding to the ending effect process (step S623), and the effect process during the big hit control is ended. As an example, in the process of step S622, a predetermined display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, a predetermined sound effect signal is transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a predetermined electric decoration signal is transmitted. It is only necessary to perform control to end the effect operation that is the effect during the big hit by transmitting to the lamp control board 14 or the like.

  Next, specific examples of various effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  As an example, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, the production control CPU 120 performs the decoration symbol variation end processing shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. The promotion effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S583), and the presence / absence of the first prefetch effect and the effect mode are determined (step S588). Here, when the promotion effect pattern is determined to be promoted SP3 (step S583), the prefetch result (holding number 2) in which the special figure display result is “losing” and becomes super reach in the prefetching result holding storage unit 195. An example in which a prefetch result (holding number 3) in which the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” is stored will be described. At this time, it is determined that the pre-reading effect of the “cat” effect mode is executed for the hold data of the hold number 2 (step S588), the execution timing is determined as one round (step S593), and the hold number 3 It is determined that the pre-reading effect of the “cat” effect mode is executed (step S588), and the execution timing is determined to be 5 rounds (step S593).

  As shown in FIG. 41 (A), after notifying that the big hit gaming state is started, the effect control CPU 120 performs the big hit according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. By performing the setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the medium effect (step S619), as shown in FIGS. 41B to 41G, the character is emptied corresponding to the promotion effect pattern of the promotion SP3. An effect operation that is a promotion effect to fly is executed.

  Meanwhile, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the execution timing of the pre-reading effect has come at the start of one round (step S603; Yes), and performs the setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading effect (step) S617), as shown in FIGS. 52C and 52D, a cat character appears and a production image sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is blue. Turn on with.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the execution timing of the pre-reading effect has come at the start of the fifth round (step S603; Yes), and performs the setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading effect (step) S617), as shown in FIGS. 52 (F) and 52 (G), a cat character appears and an effect image sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed. At this time, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is lit in blue, but in response to the prefetching effect being executed twice, the prefetching effect is executed by changing the display mode such as changing the display color. It may be possible to specify the number of times (the number of pending data with a high expectation level that is a big hit).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation as the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. 30, so that the big hit gaming state ends as shown in FIG. 52 (H). Inform the effect.

  After the big hit gaming state is finished, variable display based on the hold data is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (I) and (J), the display result of the first variable display after the big hit gaming state is a combination of loses.

  The second variable display corresponds to the fact that the special figure display result is “losing” and the super reach is reached. As shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and (B), the decorative display variable display mode is the reach. It becomes an aspect. In this variable display, it is assumed that the execution timing of the release effect is determined as “reach” in step S814. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42C, a bear character is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 42D, a lighting operation of repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed. At the same time, a release effect in which the cat character jumps out and fights with the bear character is executed. At this time, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is extinguished when all the prefetch effects of the hold data that are the execution targets of the prefetch effects are executed. Here, in response to the special figure display result being “losing”, for example, as shown in FIGS. 42E and 42F, the cat character loses to the bear character. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), a definite decorative symbol that is a combination of reach lose is derived and displayed (step S571).

  In the subsequent variable display, as shown in FIGS. 42 (H) and (I), the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode in response to the special figure display result being “big hit”. In this variable display, it is assumed that the execution timing of the release effect is determined as “reach” in step S814. In this case, as in the previous variable display, as shown in FIG. 42 (J), a bear character is displayed, and a lighting operation for repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is performed. The release effect of the cat character jumping out and fighting with the bear character is executed. Here, in response to the special figure display result being “big hit”, for example, as shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, the cat character wins the bear character. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed (step S571).

  In the example of FIGS. 42 and 43, the release effect in which the bear character and the cat character fight is executed in response to the release effect being executed during “reach”. As described above, when the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “during reach”, such a release effect may be executed instead of the effect in super reach. 42 and 43, the release effect using the cat character is executed in response to the execution of the prefetch effect by the cat character. In the variable display corresponding to the execution of, the release effect used by the dog character is executed. Further, depending on whether the variation pattern corresponds to Super Reach A or Super Reach B, the pre-reading effect may be varied. Furthermore, the production mode is determined based on whether the fluctuation pattern corresponds to Super Reach A or Super Reach B, and the production mode is determined depending on which Super Reach is used. You may vary the ratio. For example, if the variation pattern corresponds to Super Reach A, the release effect using a cat character is easily determined, and if the variation pattern corresponds to Super Reach A, the release effect using a dog character is likely to be determined. You may do it. In this case, it is only necessary that the production control pattern of each release production is provided corresponding to the variation time of each super reach. Specifically, an effect control pattern of a release effect using a cat character corresponding to the change time of Super Reach A, an effect control pattern of an effect of release using a dog character corresponding to the change time of Super Reach A, a super An effect control pattern for a release effect using a cat character corresponding to the variation time of Reach B, an effect control pattern for a release effect using a dog character corresponding to the change time of Super Reach B, and the like are provided. These should be set.

  As another example, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, on the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 ends the decoration symbol variation shown in FIGS. 37 and 38. In the time processing, the promotion effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S583), and the presence / absence of the first prefetch effect is determined (step S588).

  Here, the promotion effect pattern is determined to be promotion SP1 (step S583), and if it is determined that “no first prefetch effect” (step S589; No), the promotion effect corresponding to the promotion effect pattern of promotion SP1. (Step S595), the fact that the big hit gaming state is started is notified as shown in FIG. 44A.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing an effect operation that becomes a big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (step S619). As shown in 44 (B) and (C), in response to the promotion effect pattern of the promotion SP1, an effect operation that is an promotion effect in which a teammate character and a plurality of (for example, 100) enemy characters battle each other is executed. In the promotion effect corresponding to the promotion effect pattern of the promotion SP1, the presence or absence of promotion is suggested by the number of defeated sub-characters among the enemy characters. Specifically, the greater the number of defeated subcharacters, the higher the possibility of promotion. When the teammate character wins the boss character among the enemy characters, the fact that the big hit game state continues is informed, and when the teammate character loses to the boss character, the big hit game state ends. In this example, since the jackpot type is “16 rounds”, as shown in FIGS. 44D to 44G, after the effect image in which the ally character defeats the boss character is displayed, the jackpot gaming state continues. An effect operation that is a promotion success effect informing the effect is executed.

  Thereafter, when the effect operation that is a big hit effect according to the number of rounds “16” is finished, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 44 (H), the fact that the big hit gaming state is ended is notified.

  On the other hand, when the special chart display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 45 (B) to 45 (G), the promotion that the teammate character and a plurality of (for example, 100) enemy characters battle against each other is performed by performing the setting for executing the rendering operation that becomes (step S619). An effect operation as an effect is performed, and an effect operation as a promotion failure effect for displaying an effect image in which the ally character loses to the boss character is executed.

  Thereafter, when the effect operation that is a big hit effect according to the number of rounds “7” is finished, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. Thus, as shown in FIG. 45 (H), the fact that the big hit gaming state is ended is notified.

  On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, the promotion effect pattern is determined to be promotion SP1 (step S583), and the “dog” effect mode is pre-read. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed (step S588) and it is determined that “the first pre-read effect is present” (step S589; Yes), the execution timing of the first pre-read effect is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step) S593). In this example, four rounds are determined as the execution timing of the first prefetch effect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing an effect operation that becomes a big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (step S619). As shown in 46 (B) to (H), in response to the promotion effect pattern of the promotion SP1, an effect operation that is an promotion effect in which a teammate character and a plurality of (for example, 100) enemy characters battle each other is executed. An effect image in which the teammate character wins the boss character is displayed.

  Meanwhile, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the execution timing of the pre-reading effect is reached at the start of the fourth round (step S603; Yes), and performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading effect (step) S617) As shown in FIGS. 46E and 46F, after executing the notification effect (first notification effect) for displaying the effect image that causes the dog character to appear, the dog character is displayed as a high expectation hold display lamp. After displaying the effect image sucked into 1000, the specific notification (second notification effect) for turning on the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 in blue is executed. Note that the first notification effect is arbitrary as long as it notifies the start of the pre-reading effect, and an effect image in which a character other than a dog appears may be displayed according to the determined content.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the effect during the big hit according to the number of rounds “7” (step S619), and as shown in FIG. 46 (I), the big hit game Notify that the condition will continue. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. 30, whereby the jackpot gaming state is ended as shown in FIG. 46 (J). Inform the effect.

  On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, the promotion effect pattern is determined as promotion SP1 (step S583), and the pre-reading effect of the “dog” effect mode is executed. Then, it is determined (step S588), and when it is determined that “the first prefetch effect is present” (step S589; Yes), the execution timing of the first prefetch effect is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S593). In this example, 7 rounds are determined as the execution timing of the first prefetch effect.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing an effect operation that becomes a big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (step S619), and FIG. As shown in B) to (H), in response to the promotion effect pattern of the promotion SP1, an effect operation serving as a promotion effect in which a teammate character and a plurality of (for example, 100) enemy characters battle each other is executed. Displays an effect image in which the boss character is defeated.

  Then, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that it is the execution timing of the pre-reading effect at the start of the seventh round (step S603; Yes), and performs the setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading effect (step) S617), as shown in FIGS. 47 (I) and (J), a dog character appears, an effect image drawn into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is blue. Turn on with.

  Thereafter, when the effect operation that is a big hit effect according to the number of rounds “7” is finished, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 48A, the fact that the big hit gaming state is ended is notified.

  As another example, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, in the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 performs processing at the end of the decorative symbol variation shown in FIGS. 37 and 38. , The promotion effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S583), and the presence / absence of the first prefetch effect is determined (step S588).

  Here, the promotion effect pattern is determined to be the promotion effect SP2 (step S583), and if it is determined that “no first prefetch effect” (step S589; No), the promotion effect corresponding to the promotion effect pattern of the promotion SP2 is determined. (Step S595), the fact that the big hit gaming state is started is notified as shown in FIG. 49A.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing an effect operation that becomes a big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (step S619). As shown in 49 (B) to (D), in response to the promotion effect pattern of promotion SP2, an effect operation that is a promotion effect that collects a plurality of hearts (for example, 10) and wins a present is executed. In this example, since the jackpot type is “16 rounds”, as shown in FIG. 49 (E), after displaying the effect image in which the cake is contained as a present in the box, the jackpot gaming state continues. An effect operation that is a promotion success effect informing the effect is executed.

  Thereafter, when the effect operation that is a big hit effect according to the number of rounds “16” is finished, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 (F), the fact that the big hit gaming state is ended is notified.

  On the other hand, when the special chart display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 50 (E), a promotion failure effect for displaying an effect image in which a discount ticket is contained in a box as a present is performed. The production operation is executed.

  Thereafter, when the effect operation that is a big hit effect according to the number of rounds “7” is finished, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the fact that the big hit gaming state is ended is notified.

  On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, the promotion effect pattern is determined to be promotion SP2 (step S583), and the “dog” effect mode is pre-read. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed (step S588) and it is determined that “the first pre-read effect is present” (step S589; Yes), the execution timing of the first pre-read effect is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step) S593). In this example, four rounds are determined as the execution timing of the first prefetch effect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing an effect operation that becomes a big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (step S619). As shown in 51 (B)-(F), in response to the promotion effect pattern of promotion SP2, an effect operation is performed that collects a plurality of hearts (for example, 10) and gives a promotion effect for collecting presents. An effect image in which cake is contained as a present is displayed.

  Meanwhile, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the execution timing of the pre-reading effect is reached at the start of the fourth round (step S603; Yes), and performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading effect (step) S617) As shown in FIGS. 51D and 51E, a dog character appears, and an effect image sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is blue. Turn on with.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the effect during the big hit according to the number of rounds “7” (step S619), and as shown in FIG. 51 (F), the big hit game Notify that the condition will continue. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. 30, thereby ending the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. Inform the effect.

  On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, the promotion effect pattern is determined as promotion SP2 (step S583), and the pre-reading effect of the “dog” effect mode is executed. Then, it is determined (step S588), and when it is determined that “the first prefetch effect is present” (step S589; Yes), the execution timing of the first prefetch effect is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S593). In this example, 7 rounds are determined as the execution timing of the first prefetch effect.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing an effect operation that becomes a big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (step S619), and FIG. As shown in B) to (E), in response to the promotion effect pattern of the promotion SP2, an effect operation is performed that is a promotion effect for collecting a plurality of hearts (for example, 10) and receiving a present. An effect image in which a dog character is contained as a present in the box is displayed.

  Then, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that it is the execution timing of the pre-reading effect at the start of the seventh round (step S603; Yes), and performs the setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading effect (step) S617) As shown in FIG. 52 (F), an effect image in which the dog character is sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is lit in blue.

  Thereafter, when the effect operation that is a big hit effect according to the number of rounds “7” is finished, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 52 (G), the fact that the big hit gaming state is ended is notified.

  As another example, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control CPU 120 to end the decoration symbol variation shown in FIGS. 37 and 38. In the process, the promotion effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S583), and the presence / absence of the first prefetch effect is determined (step S588).

  Here, the promotion effect pattern is determined to be promotion SP3 (step S583), and when it is determined that “the first prefetching effect is not present” (step S589; No), the promotion effect corresponding to the promotion effect pattern of promotion SP3. (Step S595), the fact that the big hit gaming state is started is notified as shown in FIG. 53 (A).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing an effect operation that becomes a big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (step S619). As shown in 53 (B), in response to the promotion effect pattern of the promotion SP3, an effect operation is performed that becomes a promotion effect in which the character flies in the sky. In this example, since the jackpot type is “16 rounds”, as shown in FIGS. 53 (C) and 53 (D), an effect image in which the character jumps out of the screen is displayed and the jackpot gaming state continues. An effect operation that is a promotion success effect to be notified is executed.

  After that, when the effect operation that is a big hit effect according to the number of rounds “16” is finished, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. Thus, as shown in FIG. 53 (H), the fact that the big hit gaming state is ended is notified.

  On the other hand, when the special chart display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. (B) to (D) as shown in FIGS. 54 (B) to 54 (D), the character performs an effect operation that is a promotion effect in which the character flies in the sky. An effect operation that is a promotion failure effect that ends without displaying an effect image popping out of the screen is executed.

  Thereafter, when the effect operation that is a big hit effect according to the number of rounds “7” is finished, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 54D, the fact that the big hit gaming state is ended is notified.

  On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, the promotion effect pattern is determined as promotion SP3 (step S583), and the pre-reading of the effect mode of “dog” When it is determined that the effect is to be executed (step S588) and it is determined that “the first pre-read effect is present” (step S589; Yes), the execution timing of the first pre-read effect is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step) S593). In this example, four rounds are determined as the execution timing of the first prefetch effect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing an effect operation that becomes a big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (step S619). As shown in 55 (B) to (F), in response to the promotion effect pattern of promotion SP3, an effect operation that is a promotion effect in which the character flies in the sky is executed, and an effect image in which the character jumps out of the screen is displayed.

  Meanwhile, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the execution timing of the pre-reading effect is reached at the start of the fourth round (step S603; Yes), and performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading effect (step) S617), as shown in FIGS. 55C and 55D, a dog character appears, and an effect image sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is blue. Turn on with.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the effect during the big hit according to the number of rounds “7” (step S619), as shown in FIGS. 55 (E) and (F). To the effect that the big hit gaming state continues. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation to be the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. 30, thereby ending the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 55 (G). Inform the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 56A, the blue lighting of the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 performed as described above is continued even in the variable display of the decorative symbols after the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, when the decorative symbol variable display result is “losing”, in the decorative symbol variation end processing shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, as shown in FIG. Is displayed (step S571) and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 continues to be lit in blue.

  On the other hand, in the variable display corresponding to the hold data for which the pre-reading effect is executed when the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit”, the release effect setting process shown in FIG. In step S811, it is determined that the prefetch effect execution flag is “1” (step S811; Yes), and processing for determining the execution timing of the release effect is executed (steps S812 to S815). Here, when the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “during reach” in step S814, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), after the variable symbol display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, As shown in FIG. 56 (C), the lighting operation of repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed, and the decorative pattern indicating the number “7” is released from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000. Then, the effect of performing the release effect is executed in which the decorative symbol variably displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is replaced with the decorative symbol indicating the released number “7”. Then, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 56B and 56C, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is replaced with the decorative symbol forming the reach state (the ornament indicating the number “7”). However, if the decorative pattern forming the reach state is “6”, for example, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is changed to the number “6”. It may be replaced with the decorative pattern shown, or an effect display may be performed in which a message notifying that the game is controlled to a 7-round big hit state or a 16-round big hit state such as “big hit!” Is emitted from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol as a jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 56D in the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 (step S571). It should be noted that the timing of turning off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is not limited to the end of the variation of the decorative symbol, and can be arbitrarily set. It may be performed at the start of the control in the hit gaming state, during the control, or after the end of the control. Further, the lighting state of the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 may be unchanged until the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is extinguished and the prefetching effect is ended.

  If the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “after provisional stop” in step S814, as shown in FIG. 56 (G), after the decorative symbols for reach combination are stopped and displayed, FIG. As shown in (H), the lighting operation of repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed, and “6” stopped in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed. An effect operation of the release effect is performed in which the decorative design indicating the number is replaced with the decorative design indicating the number “7”. Then, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off.

  The effect control CPU 120 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol as a jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 56 (I) in the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 (step S571).

  Next, an example of display operation when a relief effect is executed will be described. For example, as shown in FIGS. 57 (B) to (E), after the pre-reading effect and the promotion effect similar to the example shown in FIG. 55 are executed and the jackpot gaming state ends, FIG. 57 (F) The variable display is started as shown in FIG. Then, when the special display result of the variable display started in FIG. 57 (G) is “big hit”, when the variation pattern PA4-2 (see FIG. 5) for executing the relief effect A is determined, If the fluctuation is not based on the hold data corresponding to the execution of the prefetch effect, that is, if it is determined in step S811 in FIG. 34 that the prefetch effect execution flag is other than “1” ( Step S811; No), as shown in FIG. 57 (H), after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, as shown in FIG. 57 (I), the decorative design for reach combination is displayed temporarily. Is done. As shown in FIG. 57 (I), the effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the lost combination before deriving and displaying the display result of the big hit combination is also referred to as a lost effect. Then, in response to the relief effect A, for example, a bomb effect image as shown in FIG. 57 (J) is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the bomb explodes to “medium”. In the decorative symbol display area 5C, an effect operation is performed in which the decorative symbol is replaced with a decorative symbol indicating the number "7". Then, in the decoration symbol variation end process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the effect control CPU 120 derives and displays a finalized decoration symbol that is a big hit combination as shown in FIG. 58B (step S571). In addition, in the variable display when the definitive decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed in FIG. 58 (B) despite the fact that the pre-reading effects as shown in FIGS. The release effect is not executed. Accordingly, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 continues to be lit in blue. That is, the right that the special figure display result is “big hit” is further reserved. As shown in FIG. 57 (I), the effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the lost combination before deriving and displaying the display result of the big hit combination is also referred to as a lost effect. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 57J, 58A, and 58B, the effect of temporarily restarting the variable display once temporarily stopped and finally deriving and displaying the jackpot combination is also referred to as a relief effect in a narrow sense. Further, the effect display for executing a series of loss effects and relief effects is also referred to as a relief effect display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) to 59 (F), after the effect display similar to FIGS. 57 (A) to 57 (F) is made, the special display of variable display started in FIG. 59 (G). When the result is “big hit”, when the variation pattern PA4-2 (see FIG. 5) for executing the relief effect A is determined, the variation is based on the pending data corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect. That is, that is, when it is determined in step S811 in FIG. 34 that the prefetch effect execution flag is “1” (step S811; Yes), the execution timing of the release effect is determined as the relief effect execution timing. (Step S815). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the decorative symbol that is the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 59 (I). A lighting operation for repeatedly turning on and off the expected hold display lamp 1000 is executed, and a decorative symbol indicating the number “8” stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C is “7”. An effect operation is performed to replace the decorative symbol indicating the number. Then, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off. The effect control CPU 120 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol as a jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 59 (J) in the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 (step S571). As described above, even if the variation pattern for executing the relief effect A is variable display corresponding to the execution of the release effect, it is replaced with the relief effect A during the period of executing the relief effect A. A release effect can be executed. Thereby, a discharge effect can be performed effectively regardless of the variation pattern.

  As another example, as shown in FIGS. 60A to 60F, after the effect display similar to that shown in FIGS. 57A to 57F is made, the variable started in FIG. When the special figure display result of the display is “big hit”, when the variation pattern PA4-3 (see FIG. 5) for executing the relief effect B is determined, the variation corresponds to the execution of the pre-reading effect. If it is not based on the hold data, that is, if it is determined in step S811 in FIG. 34 that the prefetch effect execution flag is other than “1” (step S811; No), FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, as shown in FIG. Then, for example, a character effect image as shown in FIG. 57 (J) is displayed corresponding to the relief effect B, and as shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B), a “medium” decoration pattern is displayed. The variable display of decorative symbols is resumed in the display area 5C. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), after the decorative symbols to be the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, the effect image of the character is displayed again as shown in FIG. 61 (D), and FIG. As shown in E) and (F), the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, the effect control CPU 120 finally derives and displays a finalized decorative symbol that is a big hit combination as shown in FIG. 61 (G) in the decorative symbol variation end processing shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 (step S571). ). The relief effect B has a longer execution time than the relief effect A. In addition, in the variable display when the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed in FIG. 61 (B) even though the pre-reading effects as shown in FIGS. 60 (C) and (D) are executed. The release effect is not executed. Accordingly, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 continues to be lit in blue. That is, the right that the special figure display result is “big hit” is further reserved. Note that, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the lost combination before the display result of the big hit combination is derived and displayed is also referred to as a lost effect. Further, as shown in FIGS. 60J and 61A to 61G, the effect of temporarily restarting the variable display once temporarily stopped and finally deriving and displaying the jackpot combination is also called a relief effect in a narrow sense. Further, the effect display for executing a series of loss effects and relief effects is also referred to as a relief effect display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 62 (A) to (F), after the effect display similar to that in FIGS. 60 (A) to (F) is made, the special display of variable display started in FIG. 62 (G) When the result is “big hit”, when the variation pattern PA4-3 (see FIG. 5) for executing the relief effect B is determined, the variation is based on the pending data corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect. That is, that is, when it is determined in step S811 in FIG. 34 that the prefetch effect execution flag is “1” (step S811; Yes), the execution timing of the release effect is determined as the relief effect execution timing. (Step S815). In this case, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the decorative symbol that becomes the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and FIGS. 62 (I), (J), and FIG. As shown in 63 (A) to (I), the lighting operation for repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed and stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. An effect operation is performed in which the decorative symbol indicating the number “8” is re-varied a plurality of times and replaced with the decorative symbol indicating the number “7”. Then, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off. The effect control CPU 120 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol as a jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 63 (J) in the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 (step S571). As described above, even if the variation pattern for executing the relief effect B is variable display corresponding to the execution of the release effect, it is replaced with the relief effect B during the period of executing the relief effect B. A release effect can be executed. In step S815, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution timing of the release effect as the execution timing of the relief effect, and depending on whether the relief effect is the relief effect A or the relief effect B (corresponding variation pattern). The type of release effect to be executed is also determined. Thereby, a discharge effect can be performed effectively regardless of the variation pattern.

  Further, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, the promotion effect pattern is determined to be promotion SP3 (step S583), and the special figure display result is shown in step S632 of FIG. When there are a plurality (for example, two) of holding data that is “big hit” (step S635; Yes), the pre-reading effect (first pre-reading effect) of the “dog” effect mode corresponding to the second holding data It is assumed that it is determined that the pre-reading effect corresponding to the first hold data is not executed (step S588). For example, four rounds are determined as the execution timing of the first prefetch effect.

  In this case, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the big hit effect according to the number of rounds in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 (step S619). As shown in FIGS. 64B to 64F, in response to the promotion effect pattern of promotion SP3, an effect operation that is a promotion effect in which the character flies in the sky is executed, and an effect image in which the character jumps out of the screen is displayed. .

  Meanwhile, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the execution timing of the pre-reading effect is reached at the start of the fourth round (step S603; Yes), and performs setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the pre-reading effect (step) S617), as shown in FIGS. 64C and 64D, a dog character appears and an effect image drawn into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is blue. Turn on with. In this way, even if a plurality of pending data is actually included, the prefetch effect is executed only once during the big hit gaming state.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the effect operation to be the ending effect in the ending effect process shown in FIG. 30, thereby ending the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 55 (G). Inform the effect.

  For example, when the second and third hold data executed after the big hit gaming state corresponds to “big hit”, as shown in FIGS. 64 (F) and 64 (G), after the big hit gaming state The display result of the first variable display is a combination of loses. Then, in the variable display started in FIG. 64 (H), as shown in FIGS. 64 (I) and (J), a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 65 (A). In addition, the fact that the special figure display result is “big hit” is displayed. In this variable display, the release effect is not executed in response to the prefetch effect execution flag being “2” (step S811; No). Therefore, even if the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 continues to be lit.

  After that, when the big hit gaming state is finished, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the variable display based on the pending data corresponding to the “big hit” is shown, as shown in FIG. 65 (C). Be started. In this variable display, for example, it is assumed that the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “before reach” in step S814. In this case, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), during the variable display of the decorative design, the lighting operation of repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed and the number “7” is shown. A release effect for releasing the decorative design from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), a definite decorative symbol as a big hit combination is derived and displayed (step S571). ).

  As described above, when it is determined that there are a plurality (N) of pending data corresponding to “big hit” when the big hit gaming state is reached (step S635; Yes), N “ It is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect for each of the big hit pending data. By doing in this way, when there is a plurality (N) of pending data with a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the notification effect and the release effect are provided. Even if the game is not executed, it may be a “hit”, so that the game can be made surprising, and the effect of production is improved and the entertainment of the game is improved. For example, when there are two holding data with a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the prefetch effect is not executed for the first piece. On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect for the second, after the pre-reading effect is executed, even if the “big hit” is made once, the release effect is not executed and the hold display lamp 1000 is turned on. As a result, a production effect that preserves the “big hit” is produced. If it is determined that the pre-reading effect is executed for the first piece and the pre-reading effect is not executed for the second piece, the release effect is executed, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off, and the special figure display result is displayed. Even after a “big hit”, the right of the special figure display result to be a “big hit” may remain, which may result in a “big hit” in a state that the player does not expect. You can have it. If it is determined to perform the pre-reading effect on a plurality of hold data, control is performed so that the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 continues to be lit until the release effect of the plurality of hold data is finished. Is done.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pre-reading effect in which the effect image in which the dog or cat character appears is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. When the special figure display result is “big hit” and the hold data with the big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” is stored, a dog or cat character is used and the special figure display result is When the hold data with super reach is stored in “Lose”, a cat character is used. Therefore, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation that will be a “big hit” depending on in which aspect the pre-reading effect is executed, the effect of the effect is improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the variable display for executing the release effect, when the variation pattern PA4-2 or PA4-3 for executing the relief effect is determined, the execution timing of the release effect is determined as the execution timing of the relief effect (FIG. 34A). ) Step S815). Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (I), FIG. 60 (J), and FIGS. 61 (A) to (F), a discharge effect is executed instead of the relief effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the relief effect and the release effect from overlapping, and the effect of the release effect can be improved. Further, the release effect can be suitably executed according to the variation pattern when the release effect is executed.

  In addition, when the pre-reading effect is executed during the big hit gaming state, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed to indicate that the right to be “big hit” or the right to be expected to be “big hit” is reserved. Continuously notify by turning on. Thus, since it is possible to reliably notify that the right to be a “big hit” is being held, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even if the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “2 rounds” whose game value is lower than “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. Does not perform the pre-reading effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations for the jackpot type having a low game value for the player.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when there is a plurality (N) of pending data in which the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the notification effect and the release effect are provided. Even if the game is not executed, the game may be a “hit”, so that the game can be made surprising, and the effect of the performance is improved, and the fun of the game is improved. For example, when there are two holding data with a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the prefetch effect is not executed for the first piece. On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect for the second, after the pre-reading effect is executed, the release effect is not executed even if the “big hit” is made once, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 Since the lighting of continues, an effect is produced as if “big hit” was preserved. If it is determined that the pre-reading effect is executed for the first piece and the pre-reading effect is not executed for the second piece, the release effect is executed, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off, and the special figure display result is displayed. Even after a “big hit”, the right of the special figure display result to be a “big hit” may remain, which may result in a “big hit” in a state that the player does not expect. You can have it.

  In addition, with respect to the hold data for which the determination as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is performed, “2” indicating that the determination as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is completed in the pre-reading effect execution flag. ”Is set so that the determination is not made again (step S631 in FIG. 38, steps S641 and S643 in FIG. 40). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading effect from being executed a plurality of times for the same right. In addition, when the number of reserved memories is large, the number of objects to be determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is increased. The ratio can be made constant.

  If there is pending data corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect, the variable display pre-reading notice is not executed (steps S832 and S837 in FIG. 29A). As a result, it is possible to avoid duplication of the pre-reading notice during the variable display and the release effect, prevent a situation where it becomes difficult to recognize which identification information is being displayed for the variable display, and an interest in the game. Can be improved.

  Further, during the variable display of the hold data corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect, the execution of the big hit confirmation notification effect is restricted (step S822 in FIG. 35A). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the jackpot confirmation notification effect from being executed before the release effect is executed, the effect of the release effect is improved, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

  Further, in the setting of the first prefetch effect execution determination tables 161A and 161B, when the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is the normal state, more determined values than when the probability changing state or the short time state is set. Is assigned to the determination result of executing the first prefetching effect. Further, in the setting of the second prefetch effect execution determination tables 161C and 161D, when the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is the normal state, more determined values than when the probability changing state or the short time state is set. Is assigned to the determination result of executing the second pre-reading effect.

  Here, in the case where the normal state is controlled before the start of the big hit gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start winning opening is lower than in the case where it is controlled to either the probability variation state or the short time state. The possibility that the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B becomes low. For this reason, in the case of being controlled to the normal state before the start of the big hit gaming state, the destination stored in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 is more than that in the case of being controlled to either the probability change state or the time reduction state. The number of reading results, and therefore the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the special figure display result is “losing” and the destination is super reach There is a high possibility that the number of reading results will be small. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is a normal state, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is different from the case of either the probability variation state or the short-time state. The pre-reading effect is as much as possible because the number of pre-read results that are either “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” or the number of pre-read results that are super-reach when the special figure display result is “losing” is high. By increasing the rate at which execution is determined, even if the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is any of the normal state, the short-time state, and the probability variation state, the execution rate of the pre-reading effect is extremely It is possible to prevent the decrease. As a result, even when the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the big hit gaming state, the pre-reading effect can be effectively impressed to the player, similarly to the case where the probability changing state or the short-time state changes to the big hit gaming state. it can.

  In the settings of the first prefetch effect execution determination tables 161A and 161B, when the value of the prefetch process flag is “1” or “2”, more decision values than when the value is “0”. Is assigned to the determination result of executing the first prefetching effect. Also, in the setting of the second prefetch effect execution determination tables 161C and 161D, when the prefetch process flag is “1” or “2”, a larger number of determination values than the case where the prefetch process flag is “0” It is assigned to the determination result for executing the pre-reading effect.

  Here, when the pre-reading effect is executed in the big hit game state, the player recognizes that the game is controlled to the big hit game state again, and thus stops the launch of the game ball. For this reason, when the big hit game state is controlled again, the number of prefetch results stored in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195, and thus the special figure display result, is larger than the previous big hit game state. ”And the number of the prefetch results in which the big hit type is“ 7 rounds ”or“ 16 rounds ”, or the special figure display result is“ losing ”, and the number of prefetch results that become super reach increases. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the value of the prefetch process flag is “1” or “2”, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is larger than when the value is “0”. The pre-reading effect is as much as possible because the number of pre-read results that are either “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” or the number of pre-read results that are super-reach when the special figure display result is “losing” is high. By increasing the rate at which execution is determined, even if the value of the prefetch process flag is between “0” and “2”, the execution rate of the prefetch effect is prevented from being extremely reduced. can do. As a result, even when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state again, it is possible to effectively impress the player with the pre-reading effect as in the case of the previous big hit gaming state.

  Further, in the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, the special figure display result is “of the prefetch result stored in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 until the big hit gaming state is started. Based on whether or not a pre-fetch result with a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” or a pre-fetch result with a special figure display result of “losing” and super-reach is included It is determined whether or not to execute the first prefetching effect. On the other hand, in the big hit control effect processing shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the prefetch result stored in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 until the seventh round is started after the big hit gaming state is started. Among them, the prefetch result that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the special figure display result is “losing” and the prefetch result is super reach. Whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect is determined based on whether or not is included. Thus, not only before the big hit gaming state is started but also after the big hit gaming state is started, the special figure display result stored in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”. Since the pre-reading result that is any of “16 rounds” and the pre-reading result that is the “special” display result is “losing” and is super-reach, it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined notification effect. In the pre-read result holding storage unit 195, and in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 151B, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, “16 rounds” It is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to recognize that any of the hold data or the hold data that is super-reach when the special figure display result is “losing” is stored.

  In addition, the second pre-reading effect is executed in the second pre-reading effect execution determination tables 161C and 161D regardless of whether the game state before the start of the big hit gaming state is the normal state, the time-saving state, or the probability change state. The determination value assigned to the determination result is larger than the determination value assigned to the determination result for executing the first prefetch effect in the first prefetch effect execution determination tables 161A and 161B. With such a setting, the second pre-reading effect is executed at a higher rate than the first pre-reading effect. Therefore, the special chart stored in the pre-reading result holding storage unit 195 after the big hit gaming state is started. It is executed based on the prefetch result that the display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the special figure display result is “losing” and is super reach. The second look-ahead effect can be impressed more.

  In addition, the pre-reading effect is the cause of the pending data that has been determined to be “first pre-reading effect” in step S588 or the determination that “second pre-reading effect is present” in step S609. It is continuously executed until the variable display of the decorative symbols based on the hold data ends, and ends before the big hit gaming state is started. As a result, the prefetch result holding storage unit 195, and thus the first special figure holding storage unit 151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 151B, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, “16 It is possible to reliably notify the player that the hold data that is one of “round” is stored, and to give a sense of security.

  In addition, in the second pre-reading effect execution timing determination table 162B, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR3 for determining the pre-reading effect execution timing according to the jackpot reserved storage number count value is 8 rounds to Allotted to 16 rounds. With such a setting, whether the second pre-reading effect is to be executed in 8 to 16 rounds, such as the number of jackpot hold storages, the pre-read result storage unit 195, and thus the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A Or the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be determined at different rates depending on the prefetch determination result of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. Depending on the execution, it is possible to vary the player's expectation on the prefetch determination result of the pending data.

  In the pre-reading effect, an effect image in which a cat or dog character appears is displayed on the image display device 5 as part of the jackpot effect including the promotion effect during execution of the round in the jackpot game state. That is, the pre-reading effect is executed in the same manner as the big hit effect including the promotion effect. As a result, when the player is controlled in the big hit gaming state, the player can get the number of rounds to be “16” if he / she pays attention to the big hit middle production including the promotion effect executed in the same manner as the pre-reading production. No, the pre-reading result holding storage unit 195, and thus the first special figure holding storage unit 151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 151B, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, “16 Since it is possible to recognize whether the hold data that is “round” or whether the special figure display result is “losing” and the hold data that is super-reach is stored, the game entertainment is improved.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various change and application are possible.

  In the above embodiment, the special chart display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, or the special figure display result is “lost” and the super reach. The pre-reading effect is executed based on the presence of the hold data, and the pre-reading effect is not executed based on the hold data having the jackpot type “2 rounds”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may be executed even based on the pending data whose jackpot type is “2 rounds”. In this case, the prefetch effect is executed with lower probability in the case of the hold data in which the big hit type is “2 rounds” than in the case of the hold data in which the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. For example, the rate at which the pre-reading effect is executed may be varied.

  Also, in the above embodiment, whether there is pending data with a big hit type of “7 rounds” or pending data with “16 rounds”, does the distinction be performed and the prefetch effect is executed? However, the execution timing of the pre-reading effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode may be varied according to the jackpot type of the reserved data. Furthermore, you may make it vary the execution timing and effect aspect of discharge | release effect corresponding to having performed the said prefetch effect.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the first prefetch result notification command indicating the prefetch result that the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “7 rounds”, “ The second prefetching result notification command indicating the prefetching result indicating “16 rounds”, and the third prefetching indicating the prefetching result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2 rounds” Any of the reading result notification command and the fourth prefetching result notification command indicating the prefetching result indicating that the variable display result is “super reach loss” is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. As described above, a prefetch result notification command that can specify whether the jackpot type is “2 rounds”, “7 rounds”, or “16 rounds” is transmitted. Thereby, on the production control board 12 side, the hold data is stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195 so that the jackpot type can be specified.

  When the pre-reading effect of the “dog” effect mode is executed based on the hold data whose variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, as shown in FIG. Then, after being informed that the big hit gaming state is started, the big hit gaming state is started as shown in FIG. 66 (B), and then, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C) and (D), the large dog After displaying the effect image that makes the character appear, the pre-read effect that turns on the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 in blue after displaying the effect image that the large dog character is sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 ( Notification effect) is executed. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (E) and 66 (F), the big hit gaming state continues, and as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the big hit gaming state ends.

  If the special display result of the variable display after the big hit gaming state is “losing”, the decorative pattern of losing is derived and displayed as shown in FIGS. 66 (H) and (I). On the other hand, if the special display result of the variable display after the big hit gaming state is “big hit” corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect, the release effect is executed during the variable display.

  When the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “before reach”, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), a lighting operation for repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed. The effect of releasing the decorative design indicating the number “7” from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), a definite decorative design that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 5, the fact that the big hit gaming state is started is notified.

  When the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “during reach”, as shown in FIGS. 67 (E) and 67 (F), the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, as shown in FIG. 67 (G). In addition, a lighting operation in which the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is repeatedly turned on and off in blue is executed, and an emission effect that releases a decorative pattern indicating the number “7” from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed. The expected hold display lamp 1000 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (I), the fact that the big hit gaming state is started is notified.

  When the execution timing of the release effect is determined as “after temporary stop”, as shown in FIGS. 67 (J) and (K), the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, as shown in FIG. 67 (L). In this way, the decorative symbols for reach combinations are displayed temporarily. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (M), a lighting operation for repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is performed, and a decorative pattern indicating the number “7” is displayed on the high expectation hold display lamp 1000. A release effect is executed in which the decorative design showing the number “6” stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative design display area 5C is replaced with the decorative design showing the number “7”. Then, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (N), a confirmed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (I), the fact that the big hit gaming state is started is notified.

  Further, when the pre-reading effect of the “dog” effect mode is executed based on the hold data whose variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2 rounds”, as shown in FIG. Then, after being notified that the big hit gaming state is started, the big hit gaming state is started as shown in FIG. 68 (B), and then, as shown in FIGS. 68 (C) and (D), the small dog After displaying the effect image that makes the character appear, the pre-read effect that turns on the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 in red after displaying the effect image that the character of the small dog is sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 ( Notification effect) is executed. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (E) and 68 (F), the big hit gaming state continues, and as shown in FIG. 68 (G), the big hit gaming state ends.

  If the special display result of the variable display after the big hit gaming state is “losing”, the decorative pattern of losing is derived and displayed as shown in FIGS. 68 (H) and (I). On the other hand, if the special display result of the variable display after the big hit gaming state is “big hit” corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect, the release effect is executed during the variable display.

  When the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “before reach”, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the lighting operation for repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed. A release effect is performed in which a decorative design indicating the characters “Accuracy” is released from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and as shown in FIG. As shown in (D), the fact that the state is shifted to the probability variation state is notified.

  When the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “during reach”, as shown in FIGS. 69 (E) and 69 (F), the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, as shown in FIG. 69 (G). In addition, a lighting operation for repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 in red is performed, and a release effect is performed in which a decorative pattern indicating the letters “Accuracy” is emitted from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000. The expected hold display lamp 1000 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination for the stubborn big hit is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG.

  When the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “after temporary stop”, as shown in FIGS. 69 (J) and (K), the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, as shown in FIG. 69 (L). In this way, the decorative symbols for reach combinations are displayed temporarily. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (M), a lighting operation for repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed, and a decorative design indicating the character “Accuracy” is displayed on the high expectation hold display lamp 1000. A release effect is executed in which the decorative design showing the number “6” stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative design display area 5C is replaced with the decorative design showing the character “surprise”. Then, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (N), a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination for a sudden big hit is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG.

  Further, when the pre-reading effect of the “dog” effect mode is executed based on the hold data whose variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, as shown in FIG. Then, after being informed that the big hit gaming state is started, the big hit gaming state is started as shown in FIG. 70 (B), and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 70 (C) and (D), the medium-sized dog After displaying the effect image that makes the character appear, a pre-read effect that turns on the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 in yellow after displaying the effect image that the medium dog character is sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 ( Notification effect) is executed. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 70 (E) and 70 (F), the big hit gaming state continues, and as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the big hit gaming state ends.

  If the special display result of the variable display after the big hit gaming state is “losing”, the decorative pattern of losing is derived and displayed as shown in FIGS. 70 (H) and (I). On the other hand, if the special display result of the variable display after the big hit gaming state is “big hit” corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect, the release effect is executed during the variable display.

  When the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “before reach”, as shown in FIG. 71A, a lighting operation for repeatedly turning on and off the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is executed and Is released from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000, and the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, and as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the definite decorative symbol that becomes the big hit combination is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 5, the fact that the big hit gaming state is started is notified.

  When the execution timing of the release effect is determined to be “during reach”, as shown in FIGS. 71E and 71F, the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, as shown in FIG. 71G. In addition, a lighting operation is performed in which the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is repeatedly turned on and off in yellow, and a release effect is performed to release a star image from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000. Turns off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), a confirmed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 71 (I), a notification that the big hit gaming state is started is notified.

  When the execution timing of the release effect is determined as “after temporary stop”, as shown in FIGS. 71 (J) and (K), the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, as shown in FIG. 71 (L). In this way, the decorative symbols for reach combinations are displayed temporarily. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (M), a lighting operation is performed in which the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is repeatedly turned on and off in yellow and a star image is emitted from the high expectation hold display lamp 1000. A release effect is executed, in which the decorative design showing the number “5” stopped in the “medium” decorative design display area 5C is replaced with the decorative design showing the number “6”, and a high expectation hold display The lamp 1000 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (N), a confirmed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the fact that the big hit gaming state is started is notified.

  That is, in this example, when the pre-reading effect of the “dog” effect mode is executed based on the hold data whose variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, the character of the large dog After displaying the effect image sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000, a pre-read effect is performed in which the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is lit in blue, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2 rounds” When the pre-reading effect of the “Dog” effect mode is executed based on certain hold data, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed after the effect image that the small dog character is sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed. A pre-reading effect that lights up in red, an effect mode of “Dog” based on pending data whose variable display result is “Big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” When performing read ahead effect is previously 読演 unloading the high expectations hold display lamp 1000 are turned on with the yellow to display the effect image Medium Dog character is sucked into the high expectations hold display lamp 1000 is executed. By doing in this way, it is possible to notify which of the big hit types there is pending data depending on which production mode the pre-reading production is executed.

  Further, the pre-reading effects of these effect modes are not necessarily executed corresponding to the jackpot type, but the pre-reading effect modes may be determined based on the jackpot type. In this case, when the pre-reading effect is executed based on the hold data whose variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “16 rounds”, the large dog character is drawn into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000. Based on the hold data with the highest percentage of the pre-reading effect in which the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is lit in blue after the image is displayed, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2 rounds” When the pre-reading effect is executed, the pre-reading effect in which the high-expectation hold display lamp 1000 is lit in red after the effect image of the small dog character being sucked into the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is displayed at the highest rate. When the pre-reading effect is executed based on the hold data that is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”, the medium size The character preceding 読演 unloading the high expectations hold display lamps 1000 to display an effect image that is drawn into the high expectations hold display lamp 1000 is lit yellow is performed at the highest rate. Thereby, it can be suggested which of the jackpot types is reserved data depending on which effect mode the pre-read effect is executed.

  Furthermore, depending on which jackpot type hold data corresponds to variable display, the effect mode of the release effect (for example, the lighting mode of the high expectation hold display lamp 1000) and the determination ratio of the execution timing of the release effect are different. It may be allowed. For example, instead of the processes of steps S813 and S814 shown in FIG. 34A, a process of determining the effect mode of the release effect and the execution timing of the release effect may be executed based on the big hit type. By doing in this way, the big hit type can be suggested by the execution timing and the production mode of the release production.

  In the above embodiment, in the variable display in which the release effect is executed, the relief effect is not executed. However, the effect image corresponding to the release effect and the effect image corresponding to the relief effect are simultaneously displayed. For example, the relief effect and the release effect may be executed in parallel.

  In the above embodiment, when variable display is started, a variation pattern is determined in the processing of steps S270 to S272 in FIG. 23, and when variable display is started based on the variation pattern, FIG. In the processing of steps S812 to S815, the production mode (execution timing) of the release effect has been determined. As a result, it is possible to execute effects according to the gaming state at the start of variable display and the number of reserved memories. Note that the change pattern determination and the effect mode of the release effect may be performed at a timing before the variable display is started, such as at the time of starting winning. For example, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted at the time of starting winning on the main board 11, and the variation pattern is prefetched. Then, a prefetch result notification command corresponding to the prefetch result is transmitted to the effect control board 12. On the side of the effect control board 12, when the prefetch result notification command is received or when it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetch effect (during the big hit gaming state), the effect mode of the release effect is determined. May be. In this way, the processing load at the start of variable display can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, for the pending data for which the determination as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is completed, it is not determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect again, but the pre-reading effect is executed again. You may make it determine whether to do. For example, when determining whether to execute the pre-reading effect based on the gaming state or the number of reserved memories, it is possible to make a determination based on a more recent gaming state or the number of reserved memories.

  In the above embodiment, when there is pending data corresponding to execution of the pre-reading effect, the variable display pre-reading notice is not executed, but variable display is possible regardless of the pre-read result of the pending data. You may make it perform a medium prefetching preview.

  In the above embodiment, in the variable display for executing the release effect, the jackpot confirmation notification effect is not executed. However, in the variable display in which the release effect is executed by providing a plurality of execution timings of the jackpot determination notification effect. May be configured to execute the jackpot confirmation notification effect at a timing later than the release effect. Further, in the variable display in which the release effect is executed, when it is determined that the jackpot confirmation notification effect is to be executed, control may be performed so that the release effect is executed instead of the jackpot determination notification effect. Good. In the above embodiment, after determining the execution timing of the release effect in step S554 of the decorative symbol variation setting process shown in FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not to execute the big hit confirmation notification effect in step S555. However, it may be determined first whether or not to execute the big hit confirmation notification effect, and then the execution timing of the release effect may be determined. In this case, in the variable display for executing the release effect, if it is determined that the jackpot confirmation notification effect is to be executed, the release effect is executed at a timing before the jackpot determination notification effect is executed. In addition, the execution timing of the release effect may be determined. Alternatively, if the decision to execute the jackpot confirmation notification effect is made first, the release effect is executed instead of the jackpot determination notification effect at the timing of executing the jackpot determination notification effect. Good.

  In addition, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and there are a plurality (N) of pending data in which the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, each N pieces of pending data is prefetched. Although it has been determined whether or not to execute the effect, the pre-reading effect and the release effect are executed corresponding to any reserved data (for example, the Nth reserved data) among the N pieces of held data, and N pieces The prefetch effect and the release effect corresponding to the hold data other than the eyes may not be executed.

  In this case, for example, instead of the decorative symbol variation end processing shown in FIG. 38, the decorative symbol variation end processing shown in FIG. 69 is executed, and instead of the big hit control effect processing shown in FIG. The big hit control effect processing shown in FIG. 70 is executed.

  69, when it is determined in step S631 that the pre-reading effect execution flag is “0” (step S631; Yes), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is set. It is determined whether or not a plurality (N) of pre-read results indicating that either “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” are included are included (step S632). If the variable display result is “big hit” and there is one prefetch result indicating that the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” (step S632; No), the process proceeds to step S587.

  If it is determined in step S632 that a plurality of (N) prefetch results indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” are included ( Step S632; Yes), “1” is set in the pre-reading effect execution flag of the N-th hold data, and the pre-read effect is not executed in the pre-read effect execution flags of the other hold data. 2 "is set (step S634). That is, in this modified example, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, a plurality of prefetch results (N) are included. A pre-reading effect and a discharge effect corresponding to the N-th pending data are executed. By doing in this way, the number of executions of the pre-reading effect is one time. However, even if the “big hit” is made once thereafter, the release effect is not executed, and the big hit holding display lamp until the “big hit” N times. The display of 1000 continues. Accordingly, the number of “big hit” is greater than the number of pre-reading effects. Thereby, it can be shown to the player that the right to be a “big hit” is preserved. Further, since the player's recognition differs from the actual number of “hit”, the game can be made surprising.

  70 includes a plurality (N) of prefetch results indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. In this case, since it has already been determined to execute the pre-reading effect and the release effect corresponding to only the Nth reserved data, the process of step S644 is not executed.

  Also, if there are multiple (N) pending data with a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, for example, corresponding to the first pending data The pre-reading effect and the release effect may be executed, and the pre-reading effect and the discharge effect corresponding to the Nth reserved data may not be executed. By doing in this way, even after the release effect is executed and the jackpot hold display lamp 1000 is turned off and the special figure display result becomes “big hit”, there is a possibility that the right of the special figure display result to be “big hit” may remain. Therefore, the game may be a “hit” in a state that is not expected by the player, and the game can be made surprising.

  In addition, depending on the number of pending data with a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” or a special figure display result of “losing” and super-reach, The lighting mode of the expected hold display lamp 1000 may be varied. For example, if the number of reserved data corresponding to execution of the pre-reading effect is one, the high expectation holding display lamp 1000 is lit in blue, and the number of reserved data that executed the pre-reading effect is two. For example, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is lit in red, and if the number of hold data for which the pre-reading effect is executed is 3 or more, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is lit in seven colors of rainbow (rainbow display). For example, an effect operation that is a pre-read effect may be executed. In this way, the high expectation hold display lamp 1000 in the prefetch effect is stored in the prefetch result hold storage unit 195, and hence the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, in a lighting manner. It is possible to give the player a sense of security because the number of reserved data whose special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” can be notified to the player. . Further, a plurality of high expectation hold display lamps 1000 are provided, and the number of high expectation hold display lamps 1000 to be turned on is changed according to the number of hold data corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect. You may make it display by other methods, such as showing the number of the hold data corresponding to having performed the prefetching effect with a number by a lighting pattern.

  Also, in the above embodiment, even if there is pending data with a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the special figure display result is “lost” and super Even when there is pending data to be reached, when a pre-reading effect is executed corresponding to these reserved data, a common high expectation hold display lamp 1000 is used to perform notification (specific notification, first notification effect). However, if there is pending data with a special figure display result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, and a special figure display result of “losing”, the pending data will be super reach. The notification method and the notification mode may be made different so that it can be distinguished from the case where there is. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, a big hit hold display lamp 1001 and a high expectation hold display lamp 1002 may be provided. Then, when there is holding data for which the special figure display result is “big hit” (when the pre-reading effect by the dog character is executed in the above embodiment, etc.), the big hit holding display lamp 1001 is turned on to display the special figure. When there is pending data with a high degree of expectation that results in “big hit” (for example, pending data that becomes super reach) (for example, when a pre-reading effect is performed by a cat character in the above embodiment), a high expectation hold display The lamp 1002 may be turned on. According to such a structure, the expectation degree which becomes a big hit can be alert | reported by which notification alerting | reporting effect is performed by which holding display lamp is performed, an effect of a production improves and the interest of a game improves.

  In the above embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is described as “4”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper limit of the reserved memory number. The value is arbitrary and may be “8” or “16”. Further, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number may be different from the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number. For example, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to “4”, and the second reserved memory number The upper limit value may be “2”.

  In the above embodiment, among the prefetch results stored in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 until the big hit gaming state is started, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds”. It is assumed that the presence or absence of the first pre-reading effect is determined based on whether or not a pre-reading result or the like that is any of “16 rounds” (a pre-reading result that is a target of the pre-reading effect determination) is included. explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first prefetching effect is obtained by the prefetching result stored in the prefetching result holding storage unit 195 by a predetermined round after the big hit gaming state is started. Even if the presence / absence of the special figure display result is determined based on whether or not a pre-fetched result including “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” is included as the special figure display result is “big hit” Good.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure display result is “big hit” among the prefetch results stored in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 until the seventh round is started after the big hit gaming state is started. It has been described that the presence / absence of the second pre-reading effect is determined based on whether or not a pre-reading result having a jackpot type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” is included. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of the presence / absence of the second pre-reading effect is optional as long as it is after the determination of the presence / absence of the first pre-reading effect. It may be executed in the effect process. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is started, every time a prefetch result notification command is received, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. It may be determined whether or not the result is the result, and if it is such a pre-read result, the presence or absence of the second pre-read effect may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, the pre-reading effect is based on the hold data that is determined to be “the first pre-read effect” or the hold data that is determined to be “the second pre-read effect”. It has been described that it ends after the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, but before the big hit gaming state is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the end timing of the pre-reading effect is determined as “the first pre-reading effect” or the “holding data” or “the second pre-reading effect”. After the decorative symbol variable display based on the pending data that has been determined is started, it is optional as long as the big hit gaming state is not started, for example, the decorative symbol variable display mode has become the reach mode For example, the pre-reading effect may be ended during variable display of decorative symbols.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the presence or absence of the first prefetch effect or the second prefetch effect is determined at a different rate depending on the game state before the start of the jackpot game state and the value of the prefetch process flag. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of the first prefetch effect or the second prefetch effect is added to the game state before the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the prefetch process flag, or Instead of these, the special figure game before the start of the big hit gaming state may be determined at a different rate depending on which of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. For example, when the special symbol game before the start of the big hit gaming state is played on the second special symbol display device 4B, the rate is higher than the case where the special symbol game is played on the first special symbol display device 4A. It may be determined that “1 prefetch effect is present” or “second prefetch effect is present”. As described above, when the game is controlled in the normal state before the start of the big hit gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start winning opening is more than in the case of being controlled in either the probability variation state or the short-time state. Is low, and the possibility that reserved data is stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B is low. For this reason, in the case of being controlled to the normal state before the start of the big hit gaming state, the destination stored in the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 is more than that in the case of being controlled to either the probability change state or the time reduction state. There is a high possibility that the number of read results, that is, the number of pre-read results in which the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” will be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the special symbol game before the start of the big hit gaming state is performed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the special symbol display is performed as compared with the case where it is performed on the second special symbol display device 4B. It is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed because the number of pre-read results, etc., where the result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” increases. By increasing the ratio, even if the gaming state before the start of the big hit gaming state is any of the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state, it is possible to prevent the execution rate of the pre-reading effect from being extremely reduced. it can. As a result, even when the special symbol game before the start of the big hit gaming state is played on the first special symbol display device 4A, the player reads ahead as in the case where the special symbol game is played on the second special symbol display device 4B. The production can be impressed effectively. In addition, the presence or absence of the first prefetch effect or the second prefetch effect is determined based on whether the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. The ratio may be determined at a different rate depending on whether the condition is stored based on the establishment of the condition or the condition stored based on the establishment of the second start condition.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that one of the first to seventh rounds is selected as the execution timing of the first prefetching effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first prefetching is performed. The performance execution timing may be selected from 1 round to 16 rounds. In addition, the execution timing of the first prefetch effect has been described as being determined at a different ratio depending on the promotion effect pattern and the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first prefetch effect is performed. The execution timing may be determined at a different rate in accordance with the number of stored jackpots in addition to or instead of the promotion effect pattern and jackpot type. For example, the execution timing of the first prefetch effect may be determined at a different rate depending on the number of jackpot reservations stored, similarly to the execution timing of the second prefetch effect.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that the execution timing of the second prefetch effect is determined at a different rate according to the number of jackpot reservations stored. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is arbitrary as long as it is a prefetch determination result of the pending data, and the second is determined depending on whether the jackpot type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. The determination ratio of the execution timing of the prefetch effect may be varied.

  In the above embodiment, the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is displayed in accordance with the winning order of each game ball, regardless of whether the game ball has won in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It was described that the special figure game used and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is used as a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. The game may be executed with priority over the figure game.

  In this case, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state, or is controlled to the probability change state or the short time state, the special figure display result in the special figure game using the first special figure is “big hit” and the big hit type is “ Even if there are pre-read results such as “7 rounds” and “16 rounds”, the pre-read effects may not be executed.

  For example, the production control CPU 120 corresponds to the pre-reading result in the start winning time command process shown in FIG. 28, and if it is a pre-reading result notification command for notifying the pre-reading result, the “first” start data is obtained. If it is the second prefetching result notification command, the “second” start data is stored in the prefetching result storage unit 195. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been controlled to the probability change state or the short time state before the start of the big hit gaming state, and only when it is not controlled to the probability change state or the short time state, it is shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to perform the process of step S584-S594 and the process of step S605-S615 shown in FIG. Further, the prefetch result holding storage unit 195 includes a prefetch result in which the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 round” or “16 round” (step S586; Yes, step S607). Yes), it is determined whether the start data corresponding to the pre-read result is “first” or “second”, and only when the start data is “second”, the processing of steps S587 and S608 is performed. Proceed to the processing. Alternatively, on the main board 11 side, a pre-reading result or the like in which the special figure display result in the special figure game using the first special figure is “big hit” and the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”. If it is obtained, the CPU 103 may not transmit the prefetch result notification command to the effect control board 12 by skipping the process of step S208 of FIG.

  In this way, the special figure display result in the special figure game using the first special figure is “big hit” when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, or is controlled to the probability change state or the short time state. Even if there is a pre-reading result with the type of “7 rounds” or “16 rounds”, the pre-reading effect can be prevented from being executed. Therefore, by establishing the second start condition and storing numerical data indicating each random value extracted based on the second start condition in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B as the hold data, the special figure display result is “ It is possible to prevent the prefetching result or the like in which the big hit type is “7 rounds” or “16 rounds” from being stocked.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with one special symbol display device is also described. The invention can be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 performs the final stop symbol determination process in step S551, the variable display effect setting process in step S552, and the notice effect setting process in step S553 shown in FIG. As described above, the control content of various effects operations is determined by executing the above. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the rendering operations. It may be.

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. The display control board only needs to be equipped with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the display control CPU writes various variation data to the RAM and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU stores the various data in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the display control board via the I / O display control CPU, I / O for the display controlling CPU A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board via the display is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU performs steps S551 to S553 shown in FIG. 31 based on, for example, a display control command from the effect control board 12 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12. Any of the processes may be executed. The display control CPU only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. Further, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Alternatively, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12, and independent control to become the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and the effect control pattern determined by the effect control CPU 120 in step S556 of FIG. The display control command may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 2, any one of the processes executed by the production control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 is performed on any control board. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is controlled to “7 rounds” based on the fact that the big hit type is “7 rounds”, and when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the jackpot type is “16 rounds”, it is controlled to the 16 rounds jackpot state. In the above description, it is assumed that, after the 7 round big hit state, the 16 round big hit state, and the 2 round big hit state are finished, the state is controlled to the probability change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the 7 round big hit state, the 16 round big hit state, and the 2 round big hit state are ended, there may be a big hit type controlled to a normal state or a short time state. .

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

1 ... Pachinko machine
2… Game board
3 ... Frame for gaming machine 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device
5 ... Image display device
6A ... Ordinary winning ball device
6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device
7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker
9 ... Game effect lamp
11 ... Main board
12 ... Production control board
13 ... Voice control board
14 ... Lamp control board
15… Relay board
20 ... Normal symbol display
21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch
23 ... Count switch
30 ... Operation buttons
31 ... Operation detection switch 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 1000, 1002 ... High expectation hold display lamp 1001 ... Big hit hold display lamp

Claims (2)

A start winning device that is provided in a game area into which a game medium is driven, and that forms a start winning opening through which the game medium can enter;
A start winning detection means for detecting a game medium that has entered the start winning opening;
On-hold storage means for suspending and storing variable display of identification information that does not satisfy a start condition for allowing start of variable display of identification information based on detection of a game medium by the start winning detection means;
Pre-determining means for determining whether or not the variable display of the identification information that satisfies the start condition is the variable display of the identification information that results in the specific display based on the establishment of the start condition;
Variable display means for variably displaying the identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the determination result by the prior determination means;
With
A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result on the variable display based on the determination result of the prior determination unit,
Specification for executing a specific display result confirmation notification effect for notifying that the display result becomes the specific display result during variable display of the identification information subjected to the determination based on the determination result of the prior determination means Display result confirmation notification effect executing means;
Whether contains variable display of the identification information that is the specific display result variable display of the identification information stored in the hold memory means, and, the identification information generated reach the variable display of the identification information Hold determination means for determining whether or not variable display is included,
Based on the determination result of the hold determination means, notification effect determining means for determining whether to execute the notification effect;
Based on the determination result of the notification effect determination means, after the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means, notification effect execution means for executing the notification effect;
Release that performs a release effect that notifies that the variable display of the identification information is the variable display of the identification information that is the target of the notification effect during the variable display period of the identification information that is the target of the notification effect. Production execution means;
With
In the variable display of the identification information in which the release effect is executed by the release effect executing means, the specific display result confirmation / notification effect executing unit is configured to display the specific display result determination / notification effect before the release effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized by restricting execution. A start time determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result when the variable display of the identification information is stored on hold in the hold storage means;
Prior notice effect execution means for executing the advance notice effect before the variable display of the identification information subject to determination by the start time determination means is executed;
Advance notice effect prohibiting means for prohibiting execution of the advance notice effect by the advance notice effect executing means until variable display of all identification information subjected to determination by the hold determination means is completed; The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising:

Images